Bmw 2010 X5 Xdrive30I Owners Manual

Bmw-2010-X5-X5M-X6-And-X6M-Owners-Manual-761992 bmw-2010-x5-x5m-x6-and-x6m-owners-manual-761992

2010-x5mx6mseries 2010-x5mx6mseries

2015-04-13

: Bmw Bmw-2010-X5-Xdrive30I-Owners-Manual-694547 bmw-2010-x5-xdrive30i-owners-manual-694547 bmw pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 300

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 1 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Owner's Manual
for Vehicle

The Ultimate
Driving Machine

Contents
A-Z

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 2 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 1 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

X5 xDrive30i
X5 xDrive48i
X5 xDrive35d
X6 xDrive 35i
X6 xDrive 50i
X5 M
X6 M

Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service
life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW Group

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 2 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

© 2009 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
US English VI/09, 09 07 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Notes
Reporting safety defects

At a glance
10
16
21
22

Cockpit
iDrive
Letters and numbers
Voice activation system

Controls
26
43
55
59
71
82

Opening and closing
Adjusting
Transporting children safely
Driving
Everything under control
Technology for comfort, convenience
and safety
102 Lamps
107 Climate
115 Practical interior accessories

Mobility
224
229
239
244
246
250
261

Refueling
Wheels and tires
Under the hood
Maintenance
Care
Replacing components
Giving and receiving assistance

Reference
268 Technical data
273 Short commands of voice activation
system
279 Everything from A to Z

Driving tips
130 Things to remember when driving

Navigation
140
141
150
157

Controls

4
7

202 Telephone
213 Contacts
215 BMW Assist

Navigation system
Destination entry
Destination guidance
What to do if …

Navigation

Using this Owner's Manual

Communications

Communications Entertainment

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use
the index, refer to page 279.

Driving tips

Contents

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 3 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

On/off and tone
Radio
Satellite radio
CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer
Music collection
External devices
DVD system in rear

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

160
163
166
171
178
183
187

Mobility

Entertainment

Notes

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 4 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Notes
About this Owner's Manual

Symbols used

We have made every effort to ensure that you
are able to find what you need in this Owner's
Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way
to find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.

Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<

Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual
as well; it is an important component of your
vehicle.

Additional sources of information
If you have additional questions, your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center is always happy
to advise you.
You can find information on BMW, e.g. on technology, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of information.

* Indicates special equipment, country-specific equipment and optional accessories, as
well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.

Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the relevant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.

4
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible that the features described
in this Owner's Manual could differ from those
on your vehicle.

For your own safety
Maintenance and repairs
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and high-performance
electronics, requires specially adapted maintenance and repair methods. Therefore, have corresponding work on your BMW performed only
by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and systems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any certified automotive part.<

5
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation

If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accompanying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Communications Entertainment

Please bear in mind that the manual may contain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equipment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehicle's equipment.

For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts,
you simultaneously acquire the assurance that
they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to
ensure optimum performance when installed
on your vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accessories not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehicle, its operation or its occupants.
Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Centers.
Installation and operation of non-BMW
approved accessories such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment
such as CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios, or similar accessories may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. Refer to
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center for
additional information.<

Mobility

When purchasing your BMW, you have decided
in favor of a model with individualized equipment and features. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equipment available with a specific BMW model.

Parts and accessories

Reference

The individual vehicle

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 5 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Notes

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 6 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

California Proposition 65 Warning
California laws require us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<

Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warranties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating conditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.

6
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 7 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following applies only to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.

Driving tips

Controls

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North
America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New
Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-8311117.

Navigation

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of
North America, LLC.

Communications Entertainment

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers

7
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in
Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa
region and from other countries, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C,
330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 8 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 9 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available
for operating the various systems.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Cockpit

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 10 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

Rear window safety switch 38

Opening and closing windows 37

Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 52

Adjusting exterior mirrors 52
Automatic curb monitor* 53

Instrument lighting 105
Fog lamps 105*

10
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

14 Buttons on steering wheel
Telephone*:

Automatic headlamp control* 102
Adaptive Head Light* 103
High-beam assistant* 104
Head-Up Display* 100

Activating/deactivating voice activation system* 22
Turn signals 67

Changing the radio station
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list

High beams, headlamp flasher 67
High-beam assistant* 104

Next entertainment source

Roadside parking lamps* 104

Recirculated-air mode, 110

Time, date, outside temperature,
Check Control 71, 78

Steering wheel heating* 54

Computer 73
15 Horn, entire surface
9

BMW X6: upshifting or downshifting
with automatic transmission 65

Steering wheel adjustment 53

10 Instrument panel 12
11

Windshield wipers 67
Rain sensor 68

Cruise control* 69

18 Releasing hood 239

BMW X5: rear window wiper 68

Starting/stopping engine and
switching ignition on/off 59
Mobility

Navigation

Volume

Communications Entertainment

Controls

Accepting and ending calls, start
dialing* selected phone number,
redialing if no phone number is
selected

Low beams 102

Driving tips

Parking lamps 102

13 Ignition lock 59

11
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 11 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Cockpit

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 12 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Instrument panel

Indicator lamps for turn signals

Speedometer

> Odometer and trip odometer 71

Indicator and warning lamps 13

> Computer 73

Tachometer 72

BMW X5: energy control 72
BMW X6: engine oil temperature 72 or
energy control 72

> Date and remaining travel distance
for service requirements 74

Display for

> Automatic transmission positions 64
> HDC Hill Descent Control 90

Display for

> High-beam assistant* 104

> Clock/date 71

> Outside temperature 71

There is a Check Control
message 77

> Adaptive Drive* 91

> Indicator and warning lamps 77
> Speed of cruise control* 69

Fuel gauge 73

> BMW X5: reserve display for diesel
exhaust fluid 226

Resetting trip odometer 71
Displaying service requirement 71

12
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Indicator and warning lamps
The concept

In the case of corresponding urgency, this information is displayed immediately when the
related lamp lights up.

Indicator lamps without text messages

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 13 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Some lamps are tested for proper function by
briefly lighting up during starting of the engine
or when the ignition is switched on.

Explanatory text messages

Fog lamps 105*
High beams/headlamp flasher 104
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC controls the drive and
braking forces for maintaining vehicle
stability 89

Communications Entertainment

Exhaust-gas values 245

Mobility

Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.

Additional information, e.g. on the cause of a
malfunction and on the corresponding need to
take action can be displayed via the Check Control, refer to page 77.

13
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.

Driving tips

With parking brake set for Canadian
models

Navigation

With parking brake set 61

Controls

The following indicator lamps indicate that certain functions are activated:

Cockpit

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 14 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Around the center console: controls and displays

14
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reading lamps 106

Glass sunroof 38, 40

Interior lamps 106

Passenger airbag status lamp 98

Control Display 16
Displays for menu navigation

Hazard warning flashers

Central locking system 27

10 Opening glove compartment 118
11 Automatic climate control with 2-zone
control 108
Automatic climate control with 4-zone
control* 112
Manual air distribution 110
Automatic air distribution and
volume 108
Cooling function 110
AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control 110
Maximum cooling 110

Opening liftgate 30, 33
Active seat* 52
PDC Park Distance Control* 82
Top View* 84
rear view camera* 86
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 89
HDC Hill Descent Control 90

16 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
17 Buttons on the controller 17
Selecting menus directly
18 Automatic Hold 61
19 Parking brake 61
20 Adaptive Drive* 91
21 Programmable memory buttons 20
22 Switching Entertainment sound output on/
off and adjusting volume 160
23 Ejecting audio CD

Air volume 109
Residual heat utilization 110
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation 109
Rear window defroster 109

Controls

Initiating an emergency request 261

Driving tips

14 Selecting AM or FM waveband

Navigation

Microphone for hands-free mode for
telephone* and for voice activation
system* 22

Communications Entertainment

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 15 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Seat heating* 50

12 Changing
> radio station 160
> track 160
13 Selecting radio, CD and CD/DVD changer*
15
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Active seat ventilation* 51

iDrive

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 16 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

iDrive
iDrive combines the functions of a large number
of switches. This allows these functions to be
operated from a central position. The following
section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of the individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Controls

Control Display

Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Move in four directions, arrow 3
> Turn, arrow 4
> Push, arrow 5

To avoid posing an unnecessary hazard
due to inattention, both to your own vehicle's occupants and to other road users: never
attempt to use the controls or make entries
unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

16
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Button

Function

Open the main menu

RADIO

Open the Radio menu

Open the CD/Multimedia menu

NAV

Open the Navigation menu

TEL

Open the Telephone menu

BACK

Display the previous menu

OPTION

Opening the Options menu

Operating principle

All iDrive functions can be accessed via the
main menu.

Selecting a menu item

The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.

Opening the main menu
Press the
button.
The main menu is displayed.

2. Press the controller.
A new menu is displayed or the function is executed.

Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, e.g. "Settings".

Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
Move the controller to the left or right to change
between the panels.
17
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.

Mobility

1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.

Navigation

The menu items shown in white can be
selected.

Reference

From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the following message is shown on the Control Display:

Driving tips

Buttons on the controller

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 17 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 18 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

iDrive

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
The scroll bar on the right side indicates
whether additional menu items or settings can be selected that are currently not visible.<

Example: setting the clock
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indicate that additional windows can be opened.

2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

Opening the Options menu
Press the OPTION button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.

3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.

Another possibility: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
The "Options" menu contains the following:
> Screen settings, refer to page 19.
> Control options for the selected menu.

Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.

4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is highlighted, and then press the controller.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.

5. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.

18
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.

1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off Control display"

To switch on, press the controller.

Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone

> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> SMS* received
3

Additional information, e.g. from the computer,
can be displayed on the right side of the split
screen.

Display for:

On the split screen, this information remains
visible even when you change to another menu.

> Entertainment:
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV*

Switching split screen view on and off*

> Telephone*:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
4

Split screen view, Split screen*

Sound output is switched off or
display for traffic bulletins*:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.

2. "Split screen"
The split screen is activated.

Selecting display for split screen
content*
When the split screen is switched on, you can
select the content displayed on the screen.
1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
2. Select the display.

Mobility

Other displays:
The status information is temporarily hidden
when there are Check Control instructions or
during inputs using the voice activation system*.

1. Press the OPTION button.

Navigation

Display for:

Communications Entertainment

Time

19
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Driving tips

Controls

Status information

Switching Control Display
off/on

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 19 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

iDrive

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 20 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Programmable memory
buttons
Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the
programmable memory buttons and called up
directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.

Storing functions
Displaying detailed information

1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. Press the desired button
longer than two seconds.

...

for

Touch button
period.

...

Sample use of programmable memory
buttons
Switch the voice instructions for the navigation
on/off.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the

symbol using the controller.

4. Press the desired button
longer than two seconds.

...

for

Running function
Press button

...

The function is run immediately. This means,
for example, that the number is dialed when a
phone number is selected.

Displaying button assignment
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.

Displaying short info
Touch button

...

The button assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.

20
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

for an extended

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 21 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Letters and numbers
Entering letters and numbers

Controls

1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm entry.
Symbol

Function

Driving tips

Press the controller: delete
one letter or number
Press the controller for an
extended period: delete all
letters or numbers

Navigation

Enter a blank space

Switching between letters and
numbers

Function

Entering letters
Entering numbers

Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are
available.

Mobility

> Town/city names can be entered with the
spelling used in any of the languages available on the Control Display.

21
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Symbol

Communications Entertainment

Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:

Voice activation system

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 22 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Voice activation system*
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to control operation of various vehicle systems without ever removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Individual menu items on the Control Display
can be spoken as commands. This frees you of
having to use the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
The voice activation system uses a special
microphone located in the area of the interior
rearview mirror, refer to page 14.

Precondition
Using iDrive, set the language that applies for
the voice activation system in order to enable
identification of the spoken commands. To set
the language of iDrive, refer to page 81.

Symbols in Owner's Manual
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice activation system.

Voice commands
Activating voice command system
1. Press the

button on the steering wheel.

This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal tell you that the voice
activation system can respond to commands.

2. Say the command.
The command is displayed on the Control
Display.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
If no other commands are possible, then operate the equipment via iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice
command system
Press the
or

button on the steering wheel

{Cancel}
In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the
procedure can only be canceled using the button on the steering wheel.

Possible commands
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Display.
To have the available commands read aloud:
{Voice commands}
For example, if "CD/DVD" is selected, the commands for operating CD/Multimedia are read
aloud.

Running functions directly with short
commands
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected, refer to page 273.

22
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

2. Press the

button on the steering wheel.

3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{C D track 4}
System says:
{{Track 4}}

Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts
and responses from the system are abbreviated.
1. "Settings"

> When selecting a radio station, use the
common pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language of the
voice activation system and no abbreviations.
> Keep doors, windows, and glass sunroof*/
panorama glass sunroof* closed in order to
avoid unpleasant outside noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

2. "Language/Units"

Controls

1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if
necessary.

> Say the commands and numbers smoothly
and at normal volume, avoiding excessive
emphases and pauses. This also applies
when spelling out and saying a full word
during destination entry.

Driving tips

Example: selecting the track of a CD

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 23 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

3. "Speech mode:"

4. Select a setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"

Notes
To operate the phone by voice, refer to
page 209.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the following:

23
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

> Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the
establishment of a telephone connection.

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 24 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 25 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
Its extensive array of features and accessories,
both for driving and for your own safety,
comfort and convenience, are described here.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 26 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening and closing
Keys/remote control

New remote controls
To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new
remote controls with an integrated key are
available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.

Personal Profile
The concept
Each remote control contains a battery which is
automatically charged in the ignition lock while
driving. Drive a longer distance with each
remote control at least twice a year to keep the
battery charged. For comfort access*, the
remote control contains a replaceable battery,
refer to page 37.
Depending on which remote control is detected
by the vehicle during unlocking, different settings are called up and carried out in the vehicle,
refer to Personal Profile, page 26.

You can set a number of functions of your BMW
individually according to your preferences. Personal Profile ensures that most of these settings are stored for the remote control currently
in use without you having to do anything. When
the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding
remote control is detected and the settings
stored for it are called up and carried out.

Information on the required maintenance is also
stored in the remote control, refer to Service
data in remote control, page 244.

This means that you will always find your BMW
set to your own personal settings even if
another person with his/her own remote control
and settings has used the vehicle since the last
time you drove it. The individual settings are
stored for a maximum of four remote controls,
for two with comfort access*.

Integrated key

Personal Profile settings
Details on the settings are provided on the
specified pages.
> Behavior of the central locking system
when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 28
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 30
> Displays on Control Display:

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 80

> Driver's door, refer to page 29

> Measuring units for consumption, route/
distances, temperature, and pressure,
refer to page 80

> Floor panel flap in cargo bay, refer to
page 124

> Language on Control Display, refer to
page 81

The integrated key fits the following locks:

26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

> Welcome lamps, refer to page 102

The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 103
> Daytime driving lamps*, refer to
page 103
> High-beam assistant*, refer to page 104

> Doors
> liftgate
> Fuel filler door

> PDC Park Distance Control*: optical warning, refer to page 83

Operating from outside

> Top View*: optical warning, refer to
page 85

> using the door lock

> Rear view camera*:
> Selecting functions, refer to page 86
> Type of display, refer to page 87
> Head-Up Display*: selection, brightness
and position of display, refer to page 100
> Automatic climate control: AUTO program
and intensity, cooling function, and automatic recirculated-air control/recirculatedair mode, temperature, air distribution, ventilation temperature, starting on page 108
> Programmable memory buttons: selecting
stored functions, refer to page 20
> Positions of driver's seat, outside mirrors,
and steering wheel*, refer to page 45
> Adaptive Drive*: selected chassis and suspension tuning, refer to page 91
> Audio sources: volume and tone settings,
refer to page 160
> Radio:
> Display of stored stations, refer to
page 165
> Switching RDS Radio Data System on/
off*, refer to page 164
> Phone: volume setting, refer to
pages 205, 210

> using the remote control
> with comfort access* using the door handles
The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps* are
also switched on and off with the remote control. The alarm system is armed/disarmed at the
same time.
You can find more detailed information on the
alarm system on page 34.

Operating from inside
Using the button for central locking, refer to
page 30. The fuel filler door is not locked.
In an accident of sufficient severity, the central
locking system automatically unlocks the vehicle. In addition, the hazard warning flashers and
interior lamps come on.

Opening and closing:
Using remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside.
Always take along the remote control when
leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then
be opened from the outside.<

Unlocking
Press the
button.
This unlocks the vehicle.

27
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Controls

The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.

Driving tips

> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 67

Navigation

The concept

Communications Entertainment

> Lighting settings:

Central locking system

Mobility

> Date format, refer to page 80

Reference

> 12h/24h clock format, refer to page 80

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 27 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 28 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Setting unlocking behavior
You can set whether the first press of the button
unlocks only the driver's door or the entire vehicle.

You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode*
You can also trigger the alarm system in case of
danger:

1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"

Press the

button for at least 3 seconds.

Switch off alarm: press any button.

Unlocking liftgate
Press the

button for approx. 1 second.

The liftgate will open slightly, regardless of
whether it was previously locked or unlocked.

4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the
button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Press the
button once to unlock only
the driver's door and the fuel filler door.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.

During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.
To prevent accidentally locking yourself out,
never lay the remote control in the cargo bay. A
previously locked liftgate is also locked again
after closing.<
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<

5. Press the controller.

Confirmation signals

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.

Comfort opening
Press and hold the
button. The windows and
the glass sunroof*/panorama glass sunroof*
are opened.

1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"

Locking
Press the

button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special
knowledge.<

Switching on interior lamps

4. Press the controller.

With vehicle locked:
Press the
button.

Flashing when locking/unlocking the vehicle is switched on.

28
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if
persons are inside because unlocking
from the inside is not possible without special
knowledge.<

Controls

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle
using the remote control, then the battery is
discharged. Use this remote control during an
extended drive; this will recharge the battery,
refer to page 26.

Opening and closing:
Using door lock

The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication
Commission regulations. Operation is governed by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
LX8CAS2

Driving tips

For US owners only

When unlocking
1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's
door and the fuel filler door.
2. Turning the key a second time unlocks the
remaining doors and the liftgate.

Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful interference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Convenience operation
You can use the door lock to operate the windows and the glass sunroof*/panorama glass
sunroof*.
Turn and hold the key in the positions for
unlocking or locking.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Rotating the
key back into the initial position stops the
movement.<

Manual operation

29
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
turn a key all the way to the right or left in the
door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.

Navigation

The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. Should the remote control fail
to operate due to interference of this kind,
unlock and lock the vehicle using the door lock
using a key.

Communications Entertainment

Malfunctions

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 29 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 30 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening and closing:
From inside

Unlocking and opening
> Either unlock the doors together with the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.

Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the liftgate, with the front doors closed. It does
not activate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler
door remains unlocked.

Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the
vehicle is locked.
1. "Settings"

> press down the lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals left unattended in a
parked vehicle can lock the doors from
the inside. Always take along the remote control
when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can
then be opened from the outside.<

2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle after a short time, unless a door
has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle when you drive away.

Doors
Automatic soft closing*
To close the doors, merely push them gently.
The closing process will then be carried out
automatically.
Make sure that the closing path of the
doors is clear; otherwise injuries may
result.<

BMW X5: liftgate
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<
The function is switched on and is stored
for the remote control currently in use.

30
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Closing

Opening from outside

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
liftgate make it easier to pull down.
If pointed or sharp-edged objects could
strike the rear window while driving, be
sure to provide protection around all edges.
Failure to do so could result in damage to the
heating conductors of the rear window.<

Automatic liftgate operation*
Press the button on the liftgate or the
button
on the remote control for approx. 1 second:
The liftgate opens somewhat. It can be swung
upward.

Opening manually
In case of an electrical malfunction:

You can adjust how far the liftgate is to open.
When adjusting the opening height, make
sure that at least approx. 4 in/10 cm of
clearance is available above the liftgate. Otherwise, the ceiling height could be insufficient for
the opened liftgate if, for example, the loading
state changes.<
1. "Settings"
2. "Tailgate"

2. Open the liftgate and press in the handle.
The liftgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.

3. Turn the controller until the desired opening height is selected.

31
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

1. From the cargo bay, press out the handle in
the liftgate, refer to arrow, with a screwdriver and pull. The liftgate is unlocked.

Adjusting opening height

Navigation

Press the button: the liftgate opens somewhat
unless it has been locked.

Driving tips

Controls

Make sure that the closing path of the liftgate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<

Communications Entertainment

Opening from inside

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 31 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 32 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening liftgate

Closing liftgate

The liftgate opens automatically when you:

Make sure that the closing path of the liftgate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<

> Press the button on the outside of the liftgate when the vehicle is unlocked.

Function requirement:
The tailgate is closed.

> Press the button in the center console.
The liftgate closes automatically when you
press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
To stop the closing process:
> Press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
> Press the button on the outside of the liftgate.
> Press the
button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.

Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<

To stop the opening process:

Manually opening or closing

> Press the button on the outside of the liftgate.

In case of an electrical defect of the automatic
liftgate operation function:

> Press and hold the
control.

1. Manually release the liftgate, refer to
page 31.

button on the remote

> Press the button on the inside of the liftgate.

2. Open or close the liftgate slowly and without making sudden movements.

> Press the button in the center console
again.
The opening process is interrupted if you
set the vehicle in motion.<

32
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

BMW X5: tailgate
Opening

3. Turn the controller until the desired opening height is selected.

Opening liftgate

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 33 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The liftgate opens automatically when you:

Pull the lever and swing the tailgate downward.
The open tailgate can support loads of up
to 550 lbs./250 kg.<

Closing

> Press the button in the center console.

Driving tips

Controls

> Press the button on the outside of the liftgate when the vehicle is unlocked.

BMW X6: liftgate
During opening, the liftgate pivots back
and up. Ensure that adequate clearance is
available before opening.<

Adjusting opening height
You can adjust how far the liftgate is to open.
When adjusting the opening height, make
sure that at least approx. 4 in/10 cm of
clearance is available above the liftgate. Otherwise, the ceiling height could be insufficient for
the opened liftgate if, for example, the loading
state changes.<

> Press the button on the outside of the liftgate.
> Press and hold the
control.

button on the remote

> Press the button on the inside of the liftgate.
> Press the button in the center console
again.
The opening process is interrupted if you
set the vehicle in motion.<

33
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

2. "Tailgate"

To stop the opening process:

Reference

1. "Settings"

> Press the
button on the remote control
for approx. 1 second.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Fold the tailgate up and press closed.

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 34 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Closing liftgate

Alarm system

Make sure that the closing path of the liftgate is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.<

The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood, or the liftgate is
opened
> To movements in the vehicle: interior
motion sensor, refer to page 35
> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone
attempts to steal the wheels or tow the
vehicle
> To interruptions in battery voltage

The liftgate closes automatically when you
press the button on the inside of the liftgate.

Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by
the alarm system:

To stop the closing process:

> with an acoustic alarm

> Press the button on the inside of the liftgate.

> by flashing the high beams

> Press the button on the outside of the liftgate.

Arming and disarming alarm system

Closing is not canceled when you put the
vehicle into motion.<
The liftgate also closes automatically
without pressing the button if it is loaded
with an additional weight of approx. 11 lbs./5 kg,
e.g. snow or ice.<

Manually opening or closing
In case of an electrical malfunction:
1. Push out cover 1 on the liftgate with a
screwdriver.

> by switching on the hazard warning flashers

When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
With the system armed, the liftgate can also be
opened using the
button of the remote control, refer to page 28. When the liftgate is
closed, it is once again locked and monitored.

Switching off alarm
> Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,
refer to page 27.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.

2. Push the catch 2 in the direction of the
arrow.
3. Open or close the liftgate slowly and without making sudden movements.
34
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Indicator lamp displays

Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 35 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the
doors, hood, or liftgate are not properly
closed. Even if you do not close the alerted
area, the system begins to monitor the
remaining areas, and the indicator lamp
flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. However, the interior motion sensor
is not activated.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subsequently locked again.

Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. in case of an attempted
wheel theft or towing.

Interior motion sensor
In order for the interior motion sensor to function properly, the windows and glass sunroof*/
panorama glass sunroof* must be completely
closed.

Comfort access enables you to access your
vehicle without having to hold the remote control in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the
remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket
pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the
related remote control in the immediate vicinity
or in the interior.
Comfort access supports the following functions:
> Unlocking/locking vehicle
> Comfort closing
> Opening liftgate
> Starting engine

Functional requirements
> The vehicle can only be unlocked if the
vehicle detects that the remote control carried is not located in the vehicle interior.
> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

35
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted into the
ignition lock, however for a maximum of
approx. 5 minutes: your vehicle has been
disturbed while you were away.

Comfort access*

Reference

> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.

Press the
button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

Driving tips

> The indicator lamp under the interior rearview mirror flashes continuously: the system is armed.

Navigation

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Communications Entertainment

> When transporting on car-carrying trains,
by sea or on a trailer

Controls

> In stacking garages

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 36 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> The engine can only be started if the vehicle
detects that the remote control is located in
the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote
control
You can control the functions mentioned previously with the comfort access or by pressing
the buttons on the remote control. Therefore,
please familiarize yourself with the information
on opening and closing beginning on page 26
beforehand.
The special features when using comfort
access are described in the following.
Should a short delay occur when opening
or closing the windows or the glass sunroof*/panorama glass sunroof*, the system
checks whether a remote control is located in
the vehicle. Please repeat opening or closing if
necessary.<

Comfort closing
Hold a finger or the back of a hand on the surface, arrow 2.
The windows and the glass sunroof*/panorama
glass sunroof* are closed.
Watch during the closing process to be
sure that no one is injured. Removing the
hand from the door handle immediately stops
the closing process.<

Opening liftgate
Press the button on the liftgate.
This corresponds to pressing the

button.

If a remote control accidentally left in the
cargo bay is detected in the locked vehicle after the liftgate is closed, then the liftgate
opens again. The hazard warning flashers flash
and a signal* sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness
By briefly pressing the Start/Stop button, you
switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 59.

Releasing

When doing so, do not depress the brake
pedal, otherwise the engine will start.<

Starting engine
You can start the engine or switch on the ignition if a remote control is located in the interior
of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the ignition lock, refer to page 59.
Completely grasp a door handle, arrow 1.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.

Locking
Touch the area highlighted in the picture,
arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.
This corresponds to pressing the
button.
Please make sure that all electronic systems/consumers are switched off before
locking to save the battery.<

As long as no remote control is detected in the
vehicle, it is only possible to restart the engine
within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off
if no door has been opened.

Switching off engine
> Remote control not in ignition lock:
After switching off the engine, the transmission is automatically switched into transmission position P.
> Remote control in ignition lock:
If transmission position N is engaged, the
transmission remains in this position after
the engine is switched off.

36
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 37 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to
the following steps:
1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Switch off the engine.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition
lock.

3. Lay in new battery with positive side facing
upward.

Opening, closing

The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery of the remote control.

Replacing battery
The remote control for comfort access contains
a battery which must be replaced if necessary.
1. Remove integrated key from remote control, refer to page 26.

Navigation

To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the windows and keep them in
your field of vision until they are shut.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the windows and injure themselves.<

Communications Entertainment

The warning lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer in the vehicle. After switching off the
engine, the engine can only be started again
within approx. 10 seconds if no door has been
opened.

Windows

> Press switch to resistance point:
The window continues to open as long as
you keep the switch pressed.
> Press switch beyond resistance point:
The window opens automatically. Pressing
the switch again stops the opening movement.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
37

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

The warning lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when an attempt is
made to start the engine: starting the
engine is not possible. The remote control is
not in the vehicle or has a malfunction. Take
along the remote control into the vehicle or
have it checked. Insert another remote control
into the ignition lock if necessary.

Dispose of used batteries at a collection
point or at your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center.<

Reference

The comfort access function may malfunction
due to local radio waves. Then open or close the
vehicle with the buttons on the remote control
or with a key. To start the engine following this,
insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

Driving tips

4. Press cover closed.

Malfunction

2. Remove cover.

Controls

3. Engage transmission position N.

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 38 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Separate switches for the rear windows are
located in the rear.

Safety switch

For information on using convenience operation at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 28 or 29.
For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 36.

After switching off ignition
You can still operate the windows with the
remote control removed or the ignition
switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as
neither of the front doors has been opened.

Pinch protection system

With the safety switch, you can prevent the rear
windows from being opened or closed via the
switches in the rear passenger area, by children, for example. The LED lights up when this
safety feature is activated.

If the closing force rises beyond a predefined
threshold during closing, the system will stop
moving the window prior to lowering it again
slightly.

Always press the safety switch when children ride in the rear, otherwise uncontrolled closing of the windows could lead to
injuries.<

Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the window's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
thin objects, and the window would continue
closing.
Do not install any accessories in the range of
movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch
protection system will be impaired.<

Closing without pinch protection
system
In case of danger from outside or if, for example,
ice on the window prevents normal closing, proceed as follows:

BMW X5: panorama glass
sunroof*
The panorama glass sunroof is ready for operation with the ignition switched on, refer to
page 59.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the panorama glass sunroof and
keep it in your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure themselves.<

1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold. The pinch protection system is
limited and the window opens slightly if the
closing force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point
and hold again within approx. 4 seconds.
The window closes without the pinch protection system.

38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Raising, opening, closing

Opening and closing sunroof and
sliding visor together
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point twice consecutively.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 39 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening, closing
Sliding visor
You can move the sliding visor independently
with the sunroof closed or raised.
> Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The sliding visor opens as long as you keep
the switch in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The sliding visor will open automatically.
Briefly pressing the switch stops the
motion.
You can close the sliding visor in a similar manner by sliding the switch forwards.

In the comfort position, the sunroof is not completely open; this reduces wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
Each time the panorama glass sunroof is completely opened or closed, it stops in the comfort
position. If desired, continue the motion following this with the switch.

After switching off ignition
You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute, as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system
If the panorama glass sunroof or sliding visor
encounter resistance when closing from
roughly one third of the sunroof opening or
when closing from the raised position, the closing action is interrupted and the panorama
glass sunroof and sliding visor reopen a little.

With the sliding visor open, proceed as
described under Sliding visor.

Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would continue closing.<

For information on using convenience operation at the door lock or with the remote control,
refer to page 28 or 29.

Closing without pinch protection
system

For information on comfort closing with comfort
access, refer to page 36.

In case of danger from outside, slide the switch
forward beyond the resistance point and hold.

Panorama glass sunroof

39
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Driving tips

Comfort position

Navigation

Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised position, otherwise the mechanism will be damaged.<

Communications Entertainment

Press the switch.
The closed sunroof is raised and the sliding
visor opens slightly.

> When the sunroof is raised, briefly press the
switch twice in the opening direction:
The sunroof is opened all the way.

Mobility

Raising

Reference

> Press the switch twice with the sunroof
open:
The sunroof is raised.

Controls

Comfort mode

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 40 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The roof closes without the pinch protection
system.

Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power loss, the sunroof may only
respond to the raise command. Then have the
system initialized. BMW recommends having
this work carried out by your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.

Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the sunroof manually:

4. Insert the Allen wrench* from the onboard
tool kit, refer to page 250, into the opening
provided. Move the panorama glass sunroof
in the desired direction.

1. Remove trim piece. To do so, gently lift the
corner of the trim piece with a screwdriver.

5. Reconnect the plug.

2. Using the screwdriver, press in the clamps
one after the other, arrows 1, tilt the cover
panel down, arrow 2, and remove.

3. Release and disconnect the motor plug.
This significantly reduces the effort
required for the manual movement.

6. Clip the trim piece into the cover panel,
arrow 1. Then fold the cover panel forward
until it audibly clicks into place, arrow 2.

BMW X6: glass sunroof*,
electric
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when
the ignition is switched on, refer to page 59.
To prevent injuries, exercise care when
closing the glass sunroof and keep it in
your field of vision until it is closed.
Always take along the remote control when you

40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, operate the roof and injure themselves.<

Automatic opening and closing
Briefly press the switch beyond the resistance
point.
The following movements are also automatic:

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 41 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Opening, closing
> Slide the switch back to the resistance
point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you continue to hold the
switch in this position.
> Briefly press the switch back beyond the
resistance point.
The glass sunroof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly pressing the switch
stops the motion.
You can close the glass sunroof in a similar
manner by sliding the switch forward. The sliding visor remains open and can be closed by
hand.
For information on using convenience operation with the remote control or at the door lock,
refer to page 28 or 29.
For information on convenience closing with
comfort access, refer to page 36.

After switching off ignition
You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute, as long as no door has been opened.

Pinch protection system
If the glass sunroof meets with resistance from
about the middle of the roof opening when closing or when lowering from the raised position,
the closing process is interrupted and the glass
sunroof opens all the way.
Despite the pinch protection system,
inspect the sunroof's travel path prior to
closing it, as the safety system might fail to
detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as
very thin objects, and the sunroof would continue closing.<

Closing without pinch protection
system
When there is danger outside the vehicle, proceed as follows:
1. Slide the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold it there. The pinch protection
system is limited and the sunroof opens
slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain
value.
41

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

Do not use force to close the sliding visor
with the glass sunroof in its raised position, otherwise the mechanism will be damaged.<

In the comfort position, the sunroof is not completely open; this reduces wind noise in the
passenger compartment.
Each time the glass sunroof is opened or closed
all the way, it stops in the comfort position. If
you wish, you can continue the motion by actuating the switch.

Reference

Press the switch.
The closed glass sunroof is raised and the sliding visor opens slightly.

Driving tips

Comfort position

Raising

Navigation

Briefly pressing the switch stops the motion.

Communications Entertainment

> With the sunroof raised, briefly press the
switch in the opening direction: the sunroof
is opened all the way.

Controls

> With the sunroof open, press the switch:
The sunroof is opened all the way.

Opening and closing

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 42 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Within about 4 seconds, slide the switch
forward again beyond the resistance point
and hold it there. The roof closes without
the pinch protection system.

3. Release and disconnect the motor plug.
This significantly reduces the effort
required for the manual movement.

Moving manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the sunroof manually:
1. Remove trim piece. To do so, gently lift the
corner of the trim piece with a screwdriver.

4. Take the Allen wrench* from its bracket in
the onboard tool kit, refer to page 250, and
insert it into the opening provided. Move the
glass sunroof in the desired direction.

5. Reconnect the plug.
2. Using the screwdriver, press in the clamps
one after the other, arrows 1, tilt the cover
panel down, arrow 2, and remove.

6. Clip the trim piece into the cover panel,
arrow 1. Then fold the cover panel forward
until it audibly clicks into place, arrow 2.

42
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 43 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Adjusting
Head restraint

Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at
the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms
in the event of airbag deployment.
No one and nothing is to come between the airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly
and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument
cluster, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the
front airbag is triggered.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag, otherwise
injuries can occur when the airbags are triggered.<
Even if you adhere to all the instructions, injuries resulting from contact with airbags cannot
be fully excluded, depending on the circumstances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensitive individuals. This effect is usually only temporary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 98.

Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.

Safety belts
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.
BMW X5: depending on its equipment, your
vehicle has either five or seven seats, which are
all provided with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the
hips in the lap area and does not press on the
abdomen. The safety belt may not lie across the
neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over solid
or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the
safety belt without twisting, snugly across the
lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Otherwise the belt can slip over the hips
in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the
abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents
the belt from fitting properly and pull the belt in

43
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Driving tips

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.

Navigation

Airbags

Communications Entertainment

Height

BMW X5: push the head restraints of the 3rd
row seats* into the top position.

Mobility

Head restraints, refer to page 46.

For additional information on transporting children safely, refer to page 55.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident.<

Controls

A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.

The ideal sitting position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the
interaction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seat position
plays an important role in an accident. To
ensure that the safety systems operate with
optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to
observe the instructions contained in the following section.

Reference

Sitting safely

Adjusting

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 44 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

the upper body area periodically to readjust the
tension, in order to avoid a reduction in the
restraint of the safety belt.
If the center safety belt in the rear is used, the
larger backrest half must be locked, refer to
page 124, otherwise the center safety belt has
no restraining action.<

Pull the lever and slide the seat to the desired
position. After you release the lever, move the
seat forward or backward slightly so that it
engages fully.

Thigh support*

Safety belts, refer to page 49.

Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust or calibrate your
seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat
could respond with unexpected movement, and
the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to
an accident.
Never adjust manually adjustable seats while
the vehicle is moving, as otherwise the restraining effect of these seats during accidents could
be reduced.
Also on the passenger side, do not incline the
backrest too far to the rear while the vehicle is
being driven, otherwise there is a danger in the
event of an accident of sliding under the safety
belt, eliminating the protection normally provided by the belt.<

Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the
longitudinal direction.

Adjusting electrically
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<

Also observe the information on damage to
safety belts on page 50 and on the height of the
head restraints on page 46.

Adjusting manually*
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<

Longitudinal direction

Height

Seat tilt

Backrest

44
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Height

Additional depending on seat:

The upper hips and spinal column receive supplementary support to help you maintain a
relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press front
or rear section of switch.
> Shift curvature up or down: press upper or
lower section of switch.

Backrest width*

Shoulder support*

Thigh support*

Lumbar support*

Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory*
You can store and retrieve two different driver's
seat and front passenger seat*-, exterior mirror-, and steering wheel positions*.

Backrest width*

The adjustment of the backrest width and lumbar support is not stored in the memory.

The width of the backrest can be changed with
the side wings to adjust the side support to your
own needs.

Storing

Shoulder support*
This also supports the back in the shoulder
area, provides a relaxed sitting position and
helps relieve stress on the shoulder muscles.
The shoulder support is also used to adjust the
distance of the head restraint from the back of
the seat occupant's head.
1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer
to page 59.
2. Set the desired seat, exterior mirror and
steering wheel positions.

45
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Driving tips

You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.

Navigation

Backrest

Communications Entertainment

Mobility

Lumbar support*

Reference

Differs depending on seat:

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 45 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Adjusting

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 46 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

3. Press the
button:
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
the LED goes out.
The positions of the driver's seat, the exterior mirrors, and steering wheel are stored
for the remote control currently in use.

The adjusting procedure is canceled if you
briefly press a seat-adjusting switch or one of
the memory buttons.

Selecting automatic activation
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."

Activating
Do not activate the memory function
while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk
of accident from unexpected movement of the
seat or steering wheel.<

Comfort mode
1. After unlocking, open the driver's door or
switch on radio readiness, refer to page 59.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is canceled if you
briefly press a seat-adjusting switch or one of
the memory buttons.

The function for automatically recalling the
last seat position is switched on and is stored
for the remote control currently in use.

Deactivating automatic recall
Deactivate "Last seat position automatic".

Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the ignition on or off, refer to page 59.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and maintain pressure until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the
button was pressed inadvertently:
press the button again; the LED goes out.

Activating with the remote control
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether or not the seat is reset
to that position automatically.
When using this feature, always make
sure that the footwell behind the driver's
seat is empty and unobstructed. Failure to do
so could cause injury to persons or damage to
objects behind the seat as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<

Head restraints
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of spinal injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint so that its center
is approx. at ear level. Otherwise there is
increased danger of injury in the event of an
accident. Only remove the head restraints if the
respective seat is not occupied. Reinstall the
head restraints before transporting passengers, as otherwise the head restraint cannot
provide its protective function.<

Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.

Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.

46
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Removal and installation of the front head
restraints should be performed by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<

Front seats: height adjustment

Controls
> Back: press the button and slide the headrest cushion toward the rear.
Do not place any objects behind the
headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can
impair the proper function of the head
restraint.<

Comfort seat*
You can adjust the distance from the back of the
seat occupant's head using the shoulder support, refer to page 45.

Adjusting side extensions

You can fold the side extensions on the head
restraint forward for increased lateral support in
the resting position.

47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

You can adjust the height of the head restraints
electrically.

> Forward: pull up.
Driving tips

Do not use seat covers or head restraint
covers that could impede the proper
functioning of the active head restraint. Otherwise, there is no assurance that the active head
restraint will perform its protective function and
it is not possible to take advantage of its injuryreducing potential in the event of a rear-end
collision.
Have the active head restraints reset after they
are triggered in a rear-end collision. Have this
work carried out only at a BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise,
correct operation of this safety equipment is not
guaranteed.<

Front seats: adjusting distance from
back of head

Navigation

In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient
severity, the active head restraint reduces the
distance to the head.

Communications Entertainment

Active front head restraints

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 47 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Adjusting

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 48 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

BMW X5: rear seats and 3rd row seats*,
adjusting height

Longitudinal direction*

> To raise: pull up.

1. Pull the lever and slide the seat into the
desired position.

> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint downward.

2. Release the lever and move the seat slightly
forward or back so that it engages properly.

In vehicles equipped with 3rd row seats, the
height of the middle head restraint is not adjustable.

Backrest*
The backrests can be adjusted in four steps.

Removing
1. Pull the head restraint upward to the stop.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out.

BMW X5: rear seats
2nd row seats [Second row seats]
With a divided* row of seats you can adjust
both sides individually.
Never adjust the 2nd row seats while the
vehicle is moving, as otherwise the passengers on the 3rd row seats could be injured.
Make sure that the locking devices of the 2nd
row seats engage properly. Otherwise the
restraining effect of the safety belts during an
accident could be reduced.<

Pull the lever and apply weight to or remove
weight from the backrest as needed.

Access to 3rd row seats*

Pull the lever and fold the seat forward.
The handle recess on the interior trim of
the door pillar makes climbing in easier.<

48
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

1. Push down the head restraint, refer to
page 48.

3rd row seats*
The 3rd row seats are divided and offer space
for two persons.

Folding up backrest

Safety belts
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
Before every drive, make sure that safety belts
are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Airbags complement the safety belt as an additional safety device, but they do not represent a
substitute.

2. Fold up and engage the backrest.
Make sure that the catch engages
securely. If it is not properly engaged,
transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment during braking or evasive
maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.<
3. Push the head restraints into the top position.

Navigation

1. Pull the lever, refer to arrow. The backrest is
unlocked.

3. Fold the backrest down.

Communications Entertainment

Before folding the seats up, remove the roll-up
cover, refer to page 122, and if need be, slide
the 2nd row seats slightly forward.

Driving tips

Controls

2. Pull the lever, refer to arrows. The backrests
are released.

Fastening
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.

49
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

Warning lamp for 2nd row seats:
lights up when the 2nd row seats are
not locked. A message also appears
on the Control Display.

Folding backrest down

Reference

When folding back the 2nd row seats,
make sure that the footwell under the
2nd row seats is clear. Otherwise persons in the
3rd row seats could be injured or objects damaged.<

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 49 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Adjusting

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 50 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat
and passenger seat
The indicator lamp lights up and a
signal sounds. A message also
appears on the Control Display.
Please check whether the safety belt is correctly fastened.
The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds
above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the passenger
seat.

Releasing
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be
correct for adult seat occupants of every build if
the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 44.
BMW X5: the two rear safety belt buckles integrated into the rear seat are for passengers sitting on the left and right. The belt buckle
embossed with the word CENTER is intended
exclusively for use by passengers riding in the
center position.

Calibrating driver's seat
The warning lamp lights up. A message also appears on the Control Display. Please calibrate the driver's
seat.
1. Move the driver's seat forward until it stops.
2. Move the driver's seat forward again. It
briefly moves toward the front in the process.
3. Set the desired seating position again.
The calibration is completed when the message
on the Control Display disappears. Should this
message continue to be displayed, repeat the
calibration. If the message does not disappear
even after repeated calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible.
Never carry out calibration while the vehicle is moving, as this can cause accidents.
Make sure that no persons or objects become
wedged during the calibration process, as this
can cause injuries or damage.<

Seat heating*
Front

Damage to safety belts
In the event of loads caused by accidents
or other damage: replace the belt system
including the safety belt tensioners and any
child restraint devices, and have the belt anchor
points checked. Only have this work carried out
at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or at a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Otherwise correct operation of this
safety equipment is not guaranteed.<

Belt-force limiter
The effect of the belt-force limiter on the
driver's seat is dependent on the position of the
driver's seat.
To maintain the long-term accuracy of this
function, the driver's seat must be calibrated if a
corresponding message is displayed on the
Control Display.

The temperature setting progresses one step
through its control sequence each time you
press the button. The maximum temperature is
supplied when three LEDs are lit.
To switch off: press the button longer.
The temperature is reduced, if need be, down to
no heat in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.

50
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Rear

Temperature distribution without
active seat ventilation
The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 51 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Select "Seat heating distribution" and
press the controller.

The heat output can be distributed variously in
the seat cushion and the backrest.
1. Press button 1.
2. Select "Seat heating distribution" and
press the controller.

Seat heating

Active seat ventilation

Press button 1 or 2 once depending on the
temperature or ventilation position. The LED in
the respective button lights up.
The temperature and ventilation levels are displayed in bar form on the Control Display. A display of three bars indicates the highest level of
seat heating or seat ventilation.
The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the
ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the
load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.
To switch off: press button 1 or 2 longer.

3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribution.
The setting is applied.

Heated rear seats
Operation similar to front seat heating; without
temperature distribution, refer to page 50.

51
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

Temperature distribution with active
seat ventilation

Mobility

3. Turn the controller to adjust the distribution.
The setting is applied.

Front

Reference

Active seat ventilation* and
seat heating*

Navigation

Driving tips

Operation similar to front seat heating; without
temperature distribution.

Controls

1. Press the button 1.

Adjusting

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 52 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Active seat*

The seat cushion is actively varied by alternately raising and lowering the right and left half
of the seat cushion. This reduces muscular tension and fatigue to help prevent lower back
pain.
Press the button to switch on; the LED lights
up.
The action of the system is reduced and if need
be, switched off in order to reduce the load on
the battery. The LED remains lit.
If you switch off the active seat, it can take up
to 1 minute before the two halves of the seat
cushion have returned to their initial position.

Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The mirror on the passenger's side is
more curved than the driver's mirror.
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. Do not estimate the distance of
following traffic based on what you see in the
mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased risk of
accident.<

Adjusting

Switching to the other mirror or to the automatic curb monitor

Folding mirrors in and out*

Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory on page 45.

Adjusting manually
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.

Folding mirrors in and out*
Pressing button 3 allows you to fold the mirrors
in and out again up to a speed of approx.
12 mph/20 km/h. This is advantageous, for
example, in car washes, narrow streets or for
bringing mirrors that have been manually folded
in back into the correct position.
Folded in mirrors fold out again at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before going through a car wash, fold the
mirrors in manually, or with button 3, otherwise they could be damaged, depending on
the width of the car wash system.<

Automatic heating
Below a certain outdoor temperature, both
exterior mirrors are automatically heated when
the motor is running or the ignition is switched
on.

52
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Tilting down passenger-side exterior
mirror – automatic curb monitor*

Interior and exterior mirrors,
automatic dimming feature*

Activating

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 53 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

This feature is controlled by two photocells in
the interior rearview mirror, one on the front and
one on the back.

Slide switch into the passenger side mirror
position, arrow 2.

Interior rearview mirror

Navigation

Deactivating

For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells
clean and do not cover the area between the
interior rearview mirror and the windshield. Do
not attach stickers of any kind to the windshield
in front of the mirror, either.

Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the
vehicle is moving. There is a risk of accident as the result of unexpected movement.<

Manual adjustment*

Communications Entertainment

2. Engage transmission position R.
The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat
on the passenger side. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle – such as a curb – when parking, etc.

Driving tips

Controls

1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror
position, arrow 1.

To reduce the dazzle effect of following vehicles at night, turn the knob.

3. Return the lever back to its locked position.

53
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

2. Adapt the longitudinal direction and height
of the steering wheel to the seat position.

Mobility

1. Flip the lever down.

Adjusting

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 54 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Power adjustment*

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
directions.
Storing steering wheel positions, refer to Seat,
mirror and steering wheel memory on page 45.

Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves into the uppermost position.

Steering wheel heating*

Press the button.
When the steering wheel heater is switched on,
the LED in the button lights up.

54
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Children younger than 13 years of age or
with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only
be transported on the 2nd row seats in child
restraint devices which correspond to the age,
weight and height of the child. Otherwise there
is an increased danger of injury in an accident.<

BMW X5: before mounting a child restraint
device in the center seat of the 2nd row seats,
move the outer seat cushions and backrests
into the rearmost positions.

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
device can no longer be used due to their age,
weight and size.

After mounting a child restraint device on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags are triggered.<

Exception for front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint device on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags on the passenger side must be deactivated. Otherwise, there
is an increased risk of injury for the child if the
airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint
device.<

Before installing a child restraint device, move
the passenger seat into the furthest back and
highest* position in order to achieve the best
possible safety belt position. Do not change the
seat position after this.

For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 98.

Backrest width*

Installing child restraint
devices

The backrest width adjustment of the
front passenger seat must be completely
open. After installing the child's seat, no memory position may be called up; otherwise, the
stability of the child's seat on the front passenger seat is reduced.<

Follow the child restraint device manufacturer's instructions for selection, installation, and use of child restraint devices. Otherwise, the degree of protection may be
reduced.<

Controls

On front passenger seat

Seat position

1. Open backrest width adjustment completely, refer to page 45.
2. Install child's seat.

55
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation

Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is on the rear seat.

Communications Entertainment

Children always in rear

Mobility

Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, otherwise they could endanger
themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening
the doors.<

BMW X5: for equipment with 3rd row
seats*, make sure that the seat of the 2nd
row seats on which the child restraint device is
mounted is properly locked. Otherwise there is
an increased risk of injury for the child in an
accident.
Do not mount child restraint devices on the
3rd row seats, as otherwise the protection provided by these child restraint devices may be
reduced.<

Reference

The right place for children

Driving tips

Transporting children safely

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 55 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Transporting children safely

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 56 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Child seat security

Before attaching the child's seat, pull the belt
away from the region of the child restraint fixing
system.
Make sure that the LATCH mounts have
properly clicked into place and that the
child restraint device is resting snugly against
the backrest. Otherwise, the protective action
may be reduced.<

The rear safety belts
> BMW X5: all safety belts of the 2nd and
3rd* row seats
> BMW X6: all safety belts of the 2nd row
seats
and the safety belt for the front passenger can
be locked to prevent extension in order to permit attachment of child restraint devices.

Locking safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint device with the
belt.
2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and
pull taut against the child restraint device.
The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.

The mounts for the LATCH anchors are located
at the points indicated by the arrows.

Child restraint device with tether strap
Only use the top tether mounting points
to secure child restraint devices, otherwise the mounting points could be damaged.
Do not mount child restraint devices on the
3rd row seats in the BMW X5; otherwise the
protection provided by these child restraint
devices may be reduced.<

BMW X5

2. Remove the child restraint device.
3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in completely.

LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren.
Follow the system manufacturer's
instructions on installation and use of
LATCH child restraint devices; otherwise, their
protective function may be reduced.<

There are three additional mounting points for
child restraint devices with a tether strap on the
2nd row seats, refer to arrows. Fold out before
using the center mounting point.

56
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Backrest

Tether strap of child restraint device

Controls

When using the cargo bay cover, route the
tether strap through between the backrest of
the 2nd row seats and the cargo bay cover.

BMW X6

Navigation

Make sure that the tether strap is not
routed over sharp edges and does not
twist on its way to the attachment point; otherwise, the belt cannot properly secure the child
restraint device in the event of an accident.<

Direction of travel

Head restraint

Tether strap hook

Mounting point

Communications Entertainment

BMW X5

Direction of travel

Head restraint

Tether strap hook

Mounting point

Backrest

Tether strap of child restraint device

When using the cargo bay cover, route the
tether strap through between the rear seat
backrest and the cargo bay cover.

57
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

Placement of tether strap

Driving tips

For child restraint devices with tether strap,
there are two additional attachment points on
the back of the rear seat backrests, refer to
arrows.

Reference

BMW X6

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 57 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Transporting children safely

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 58 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

On the center seat when equipped with three
rows of seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint brackets.
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.

Attaching tether strap to the backrest
of the 2nd row seats
BMW X5:

5. Pull tether strap taut.
BMW X6:
1. Route tether strap over the middle of the
head restraint.

On outer seats:
1. Slide the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the tether strap between the head
restraint brackets.
3. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
4. Slide the head restraint into the bottom
position.
5. Pull tether strap taut.
On the center seat when equipped with two
rows of seats:

2. Hook in the tether strap on the mounting
point with the hook.
3. Pull tether strap taut until it compresses the
cushion of the head restraint, thus preventing the tether strap from sliding off.

On trips
Child-safety locks for rear doors

1. Fold the center armrest somewhat toward
the front.
2. Guide the tether strap through the opening
in the center armrest.

Slide down the safety lever on the rear doors:
the door can now be opened from the outside
only.

Safety switch for power windows
3. Fold back and engage the center armrest.
4. Hook in tether strap on mounting point.
5. Pull tether strap taut.

Always press the safety switch for the power
windows, refer to page 38, when children are
riding in the rear of the vehicle.

58
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Driving
Start/Stop button

With comfort access, only insert the remote
control into the ignition lock in exceptional
cases, refer to page 35.

Removing remote control from ignition
lock
Do not pull the remote control out of the
ignition lock using force, as otherwise
damage may result.<
Before removing the remote control, first press
it in as far as possible to release the locking
device.
The ignition is switched off if it was still
switched on.

Radio readiness
Some electronic systems/consumers are ready
for operation. The time and outside temperature are displayed in the instrument panel.
Radio readiness is automatically switched off:
> when the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> with comfort access* by touching the sensitive surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 36

Ignition on
All electronic systems/consumers are ready for
operation. The odometer and the trip odometer
are displayed in the instrument panel, refer to
page 71.
Please switch off the ignition and the
electronic systems/consumers which are
not required when the engine is not running to
save the battery.<

Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator lamps, warning lamps, and displays
in the instrument panel go out.

59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation

Comfort access*

Pressing the Start/Stop button with the
brake pedal depressed starts the
engine.<

Communications Entertainment

Insert the remote control as far as possible into
the ignition lock.
Radio readiness switches on. Some electronic
systems/consumers are ready for operation.

Mobility

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the
radio readiness or the ignition on and off.

Driving tips

Controls

Inserting remote control into ignition
lock

Reference

Ignition lock

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 59 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 60 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The ignition switches off automatically* if the
driver's door is opened. Pressing the start/stop
button again switches the ignition back on.

Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort
access in vehicle, refer to page 35.

For example, the ignition is not switched off in
the following situations:

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

> the brakes are actuated
> the low beams are switched on

Starting engine
Do not run the engine in closed rooms,
otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause unconsciousness and death.
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.
Never leave an unattended vehicle with the
engine running, as such a vehicle represents a
potential safety hazard.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling, always
engage transmission position N or P and set the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine
speed.
The engine starts when you depress the
brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop
button.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succession or repeated starting attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or inadequately burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<

1. Depress brake pedal.
The system responds by automatically engaging the starter for a certain period and automatically disengaging it as soon as the engine
starts.

Diesel engine
When the engine is cold and at temperatures
below approx. 327/06 the starting process
may be somewhat delayed due to automatic
preglowing. The preglowing indicator lamp in
the instrument panel lights up. A message
appears on the Control Display.

Switching off engine
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control.
Set the parking brake firmly when parking; otherwise, the vehicle could roll.<

Procedure
1. Engage transmission position P with the
vehicle stationary.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the ignition lock, refer to page 59.

Before driving into a car wash
The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to
the following steps:
1. With comfort access*: insert the remote
control into the ignition lock.
2. Depress brake pedal.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release the parking brake or deactivate
Automatic Hold.
5. Switch off the engine.

60
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to set the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, pull on the button longer.
The vehicle continues to brake forcefully for as
long as you pull on the button.

Your BMW is equipped with an electromechanical parking brake.
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
You can use the parking brake in two ways:
> manually, by pulling and pushing the button
> automatically, by activating Automatic
Hold, refer to page 61

Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

As soon as you brake the vehicle almost to a
stop, i.e., down to a speed of approx. 2 mph/
3 km/h or below, the parking brake remains set.

Releasing manually

Navigation

With the engine stopped, the parking brake acts
on the rear wheels via an electromechanical
system. When the engine is running, the parking brake acts on the disk brakes of the front
and rear wheels via the brake hydraulics.

Setting manually
Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel goes out.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

Pull button. The parking brake is set.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up red. The parking brake is
set.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking
brake, for example.<

Automatic Hold
The concept

The remote control does not have to be
inserted into the ignition lock for the parking
brake to be set.

Communications Entertainment

The concept

The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up red, a chime sounds and
the brake lamps light up.

This function assists you as you drive by automatically setting and releasing the parking
brake, e.g. when you are stopped at a traffic signal or in stop-and-go traffic.
When Automatic Hold is activated, the vehicle is
61

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

Parking brake

Reference

> if you remove the remote control from the
ignition lock

Controls

While driving

> automatically after approx. 30 minutes

Driving tips

Transmission position P will be engaged:

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 61 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 62 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

automatically held in place when standing.
When driving up inclines, the system prevents
your vehicle from rolling backward in an undesired way.
After the engine is started, the system can be
activated and deactivated at any time the
driver's seat is occupied until the next time the
engine is switched off.

Activating

The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

If the transmission is in a drive position, simply
press on the gas pedal to begin driving. The
brake is automatically released and the indicator lamp goes out.
Before driving into the car wash, deactivate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking brake will be automatically set after stopping and the vehicle can no longer roll.<

Parking
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold
and you switch off the motor, the parking brake
is automatically set.
Press the button. The LED in the button lights
up and the indication AUTO H appears in the
instrument panel.
Automatic Hold is activated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic
Hold, the indicator light in the instrument panel also lights up in green.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

Deactivating
Press the button again, the LED in the button
and the indication AUTO H in the instrument
panel go out.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
then press on the brake pedal to deactivate it.
When the parking brake is set manually, refer to
page 61, Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated.

The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel changes from green to red.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

The parking brake is not set if you have
already switched off the engine while the
vehicle is rolling to a stop.
Automatic Hold is deactivated.<
You can manually release the parking brake
even after switching off the motor as long as the
remote control remains in the ignition lock, refer
to page 61. Use this function in car washes, for
example.
When leaving the vehicle, always take
along the remote control; this precaution
prevents children from releasing the parking
brake, for example.<

For your safety
Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated
when:

Driving
With Automatic Hold activated, the vehicle is
automatically prevented from rolling after it
comes to a stop.

> the engine is switched off
> the driver's door is open and the safety belt
of the driver is disconnected

62
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

3. Insert the releasing tool, contained in the
onboard tool kit under the floor panel, refer
to page 250, at the releasing point.

Driving tips

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, shift the selector lever into position P of the automatic transmission and make
sure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise,
the vehicle may begin to roll.<

Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, secure
the vehicle against rolling, e.g. with a wheel
chock, if you leave the vehicle.

Releasing parking brake manually
In the event of an electrical power loss or electrical malfunction, you can release the parking
brake manually.
Before manually releasing the parking
brake and each time you park the vehicle
without setting the parking brake, make sure
that the automatic transmission is in position P,
refer to page 65. Be sure to pay attention to the
information in the instrument panel.
In addition, secure the vehicle against rolling,
e.g. with a wheel chock. Otherwise there is a
danger that the vehicle could roll if parked on a
steep slope.<
If it becomes necessary to also release the
transmission lock of the automatic transmission
manually, follow this sequence:
1. If necessary, start by releasing the parking
brake manually.
2. Then release the automatic transmission's
transmission lock manually, refer to
page 66.
Jump starting and towing, refer to information
starting on page 262.

Controls

2. Remove the first-aid kit * and warning triangle* if necessary. Close the bracket of the
warning triangle.

4. Firmly pull the releasing tool upward against
the mechanical resistance, refer to arrow,
until a considerable increase in force is felt
and the parking brake is then clearly heard
to release.
5. Stow the releasing tool, warning triangle*
and first-aid kit* and close the left side
panel in the cargo bay.
Only have a malfunction corrected by the
nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a workshop that works in accordance
with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately
trained personnel. If the parking brake has been
released manually in response to a malfunction,
only technicians can return it to operation.<
Following manual release, the actual status of the parking brake may deviate from
that displayed by the indicator lamp.<

Navigation

Before you start to drive, either release the
parking brake manually, refer to page 61, or
reactivate Automatic Hold, refer to page 62.

1. Open the left-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.

Communications Entertainment

Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

Releasing

Operation after interruptions in power
supply
The parking brake can only be used again
if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power. Otherwise the operation of the parking brake is not
ensured and there is a danger of the vehicle rolling despite the parking brake being set.<

63
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

In the instrument panel, the indicator
lamp changes from green to red and
the indication AUTO H goes out.

Reference

> the vehicle is braked to a stop during driving

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 63 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 64 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Procedure
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the button with the brake depressed.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel goes out as soon as the parking
brake is ready for operation again.
Indicator lamp on Canadian models.

> With the vehicle stationary, depress the
brake pedal before shifting out of P or N;
otherwise the shift command will not be
executed: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
maintain pressure on the brake pedal until
you are ready to start.<

Shifting into D, R, N
Any noises which occur are normal. Startup
may take several seconds.

Automatic transmission with
Steptronic
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 65.

Transmission positions
P R N D M/S + –
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to start.<

Displays in instrument panel

P R N D, DS*, S1* through S6*, M1 through M6
The transmission position and the currently
engaged gear are displayed.

Engaging transmission position
> You can only engage transmission positions D, R or N when the engine is running.

Briefly press the selector lever in the desired
direction, beyond a resistance point if necessary. When shifting out of P or into R, simultaneously push the unlock button 1.
The engaged transmission position is displayed
on the selector lever.
The selector lever immediately returns to the
center position when released.

Engaging P

Press button P.
Also observe the additional information on the
automatic transmission.
The transmission automatically shifts into
park if you release the driver's safety belt
and open the driver's door with the engine running while in reverse or drive.<

64
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

R Reverse

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Select only with the vehicle stationary.
An interlock prevents inadvertent gearshifts
into transmission position R. To release the
lock, push the unlock button 1.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 65 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

N Neutral
Can, for example, be engaged in automatic car
washes. The vehicle can roll.
N remains engaged even after the engine
is switched off whenever you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. This function
is used, for example, in a car wash, refer to
page 60. After approx. 30 minutes P is automatically engaged.<

D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are available.
Under normal operating conditions, the fuel
consumption is lowest when driving in position D.

Kick-down
The kick-down mode provides maximum acceleration.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the
increased resistance at full throttle.

Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument panel, followed by the current gear.
To use the automatic function again, press the
selector lever to the right into position D.

BMW X6: changing gears using shifting
paddles on steering wheel
The shifting paddles make it possible to quickly
change gears since both hands can remain on
the steering wheel.
> In automatic mode D, if you shift using the
shifting paddles on the steering wheel, then
the system switches into manual mode.
> If, after a certain amount of time, you neither
shift with the shifting paddles nor accelerate, then the system switches back into
automatic mode D.
With the transmission position M/S
selected, the manual mode remains
active.<
65

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Driving tips
Navigation

When the selector lever is pressed forward or
back, the manual mode is activated and the
Steptronic shifts the gear. The instrument
panel shows M1 through M6.

Communications Entertainment

Press selector lever out of transmission
position D toward the left:
The sport program is activated and DS is
displayed in the instrument cluster; in the
BMW X6, S1 through S6 are displayed. This
position is recommended for a performanceoriented driving style.

Mobility

P is engaged automatically as soon as
you switch off the engine unless N is
engaged and on vehicles with comfort access
the remote control is inserted in the ignition
lock, refer to page 59.<

Reference

Select only with the vehicle stationary. The rear
wheels are locked.

Controls

P Park

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 66 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving

Releasing
1. Slide back the cover of the cup holder and
remove the floor mat on the bar between
the cup holders, arrow 1.

> Upshifting: pull on one of the shifting paddles, arrows +.
> Downshifting: press on one of the shifting
paddles, arrows –.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system. The
selected gear is briefly displayed in the instrument panel, followed by the current gear.

Manually releasing and engaging
transmission lock

2. Open the cover in the bottom of the cup
holder with the releasing tool from the
onboard tool kit, page 250, refer to arrow 2.
3. If necessary, unlock the lock* with the integrated key of the remote control, refer to
page 26, and remove it.
4. Insert the releasing tool into the opening,
arrow 3.

In case of a power failure, e.g. when the
battery is drained or disconnected, or an
electrical malfunction, the transmission lock
must be manually released, as otherwise the
rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot
be towed.<
Step on the brake when manually releasing the transmission lock; otherwise,
there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<
The transmission lock should only be released
for towing. Reengage the transmission lock
after parking the vehicle at its destination.
If it also becomes necessary to manually
release the parking brake, follow this sequence:
1. Secure the vehicle against rolling.

5. Turn the releasing tool as far as possible,
arrow 4, and then press downward and
leave it in. The transmission lock is
released.
Engage the transmission lock after parking the vehicle at its destination. Otherwise there is a danger of the vehicle rolling.<

2. Manually release the parking brake, refer to
page 63.
3. Manually release the transmission lock of
the automatic transmission.

66
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Locking

Signaling briefly
Press lever to resistance point and hold for as
long as you wish to signal.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 67 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Triple turn signal activation

You can activate or deactivate this function.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"

Information on jump starting and towing, from
page 262.

Turn signals/headlamp
flasher/high beams

Triple turn signal activation is activated and
is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Washer/wiper system

High beams

Headlamp flasher

Turn signals

Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To switch off manually, press the lever up to the
resistance point.
Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb
needs to be replaced.<

Switching on wipers

Switching off wipers or brief wipe

Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor*

Cleaning windshield and headlamps*

Setting interval for intermittent wipe or sensitivity of the rain sensor*

67
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

4. Close the cover of the cup holder and stow
the releasing tool.

Mobility

3. Close the cover in the bottom of the cup
holder and lay in the mat again.

Navigation

Driving tips

2. If necessary, insert the lock* and lock it.

Reference

1. Pull out the releasing tool.
The transmission lock is engaged again.

Controls

Press the lever up to the resistance point. The
turn signal flashes three times.

Driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 68 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Switching on wipers
Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial position when released.

Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system reverts to operation in the intermittent mode with the vehicle stationary.

Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system reverts to normal speed with the
vehicle stationary.

Intermittent operation or rain sensor*
With the rain sensor, the wiper operation is controlled automatically as a function of the rain
intensity. The rain sensor is located on the
windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating intermittent operation or
rain sensor

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing
through an automatic car wash. Failure to
do so could result in damage caused by undesired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
The system sprays washer fluid against the
windshield and activates the wipers for a brief
period.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are also cleaned at regular
and appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do so, your vision could be
obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid
antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use
washing mechanisms when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage
the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles
Both windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

BMW X5: rear window wiper

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the button lights up.

Setting interval for intermittent wipe or
sensitivity of rain sensor

Intermittent mode. When reverse gear is
engaged, continuous operation is switched
on automatically

Cleaning the rear window

Turn the thumbwheel 5.

Deactivating intermittent operation or
rain sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.

Do not use washing mechanisms when
the washer fluid reservoir is empty, otherwise you will damage the washer pump.<

68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reservoir.
Fill with water and – if required – with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recommendations.
In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix
the washer fluid before filling.<

Capacity

Storing speed and maintaining or increasing

Storing speed and maintaining or decreasing

Deactivating cruise control

Resuming stored speed

Maintaining current speed
Briefly press, arrow 1, or briefly pull, arrow 2
lever.
The speed currently being driven is stored and
maintained. It is indicated on the speedometer
and briefly in the instrument panel.

Cruise control*

The controlled speed can drop on uphill grades
if the engine output is insufficient. If the engine
braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill
grade, the system lightly brakes the vehicle.

The concept

Increasing speed

The cruise control with a braking function is
available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/
30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and
maintains the speed that you set using the lever
mounted on the steering column. To keep the
specified speed constant, the system brakes if

Repeatedly press the lever up to or beyond the
resistance point, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is set.

Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.

Controls
Driving tips

One lever for all functions

> Each time the lever is pressed to the resistance point, the speed is increased by
approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
69

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation

Only add washer fluid with the engine
cooled down to exclude contact with hot
engine components. Otherwise there is a danger of fire and to personal safety if the fluid is
spilled.<

Communications Entertainment

Filler neck for washer fluid

Do not use the cruise control under driving conditions that do not permit a constant speed, e.g. when driving on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions
such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface.
Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident.<

Mobility

Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For
this reason, keep it away from ignition
sources and store only in the closed original
container out of reach of children. Otherwise,
there is the danger of bodily injury. Always
observe the instructions for use provided on the
containers.<

the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a
downhill grade.

Reference

Washer fluid

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 69 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 70 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed
increases by a maximum of 5 mph or 10 km/
h.
The system stores the setting and maintains
the set speed.

Accelerating with lever

> when the parking brake is set
> when driving stability control systems intervene
Accelerating does not deactivate the cruise
control. After releasing the accelerator pedal,
the stored speed is reached and maintained
again.

Accelerate slightly:

Warning lamp

Press the lever up to the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.

The warning lamp lights up if the
cruise control has been deactivated
automatically, e.g. by a control intervention of the DSC. A message appears on the
Control Display.

Accelerate more rapidly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores the
setting and maintains the set speed.

Resuming stored speed

Reducing speed

With the ignition switched off, the stored speed
value is deleted and cannot be resumed again.

Repeatedly pull the lever up to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired
speed is displayed.

Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The stored
speed is resumed and maintained.

Displays in instrument panel

> Each time the lever is pulled up to the resistance point, the desired speed decreases
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
decreased by a maximum of 5 mph or
10 km/h until the minimum speed of
20 mph or 30 km/h is reached.
The system stores the setting and maintains
the set speed.

Deactivating cruise control
Briefly press the lever up or down, arrow 3.
The displays in the speedometer go out.
In addition, the system is automatically deactivated:
> when braking
> when transmission position N is engaged
> when DTC is activated or DSC is deactivated

Stored desired speed

Selected desired speed appears briefly

If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument panel display, it is possible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.<

Malfunction
The warning lamp lights up if the system has failed. A message appears on
the Control Display. Detailed information is provided from page 77.

> when HDC is activated

70
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 71 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything under control
Retrieving date

To set the date, refer to page 80.

Time, outside temperature, and date

Odometer and trip odometer

Pressing the button upward or downward several times changes the display between clock,
outside temperature, date, and Check Control
messages, refer to page 78.

Knob in the instrument panel
> With ignition switched on
Press knob:
Resetting trip odometer
Press the knob for approx. 5 seconds:
Displaying service requirements, refer to
page 74
> With ignition switched off
Press knob:
Briefly displaying time, outside temperature
and odometer

Outside temperature warning
If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal
sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Display. There is
an increased danger of ice.
Even at temperatures above +377/
+36 ice can form. Therefore, drive carefully, e.g. on bridges and sections of road in the
shade, otherwise there is an increased accident
risk.<

Units of measure

Odometer and trip odometer

To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 80.

Resetting trip odometer:
Press knob 1 in the instrument panel with the
ignition switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

When vehicle is parked

Time, date, outside temperature
From radio readiness the outside temperature
and the time are displayed.

To briefly display the time, outside temperature
and mileage after the remote control has been
removed from the ignition lock:
Press knob 1 in the instrument panel.

Navigation

Knob in the instrument cluster

Communications Entertainment

Mobility

Press the button on turn signal lever upward;
the date appears.

Driving tips

Controls

Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock

71
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Setting the time, refer to page 79.

Everything under control

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 72 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Tachometer

Engine oil temperature*

When the engine is at operating temperature,
the engine oil temperature is between approx.
1707/806 and approx. 2507/1206.
When the engine oil temperature is too high, a
warning lamp lights up in the instrument panel.

Energy control*
Do not operate the engine with the needle in the
red overspeed zone of the gauge, refer to arrow.
At high revs in this range, the flow of fuel is
interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature
Should the coolant, and with it the engine
become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In
addition, a message appears on the Control
Display.
Checking coolant level, refer to page 243.

Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with minimum exhaust emissions.

72
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Fuel gauge

The following information is displayed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 73 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Reserve

Average speed

After the reserve quantity has been reached, a
message briefly appears on the Control Display;
the remaining range is shown in the computer.
Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the
message remains on the Control Display.

Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
stopped are not included in the calculations of
average speed.

Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

To reset average speed: press the BC button on
the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.

Computer

To reset average fuel consumption:
Press the BC button on the turn signal lever for
approx. 2 seconds.

Displays in instrument panel

For different routes

Mobility

You can display the average speed and average
consumption for two different routes on the
Control Display, refer to the following and to
Trip computer*.

Driving tips

Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

Navigation

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

To display the information, press the BC button
on the turn signal lever.

73
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 22.5 US gal/
85 liters. You will find information on refueling
on page 224.

Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is projected
based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/
30 km.

Communications Entertainment

Cruising range

Controls

> BMW X6: Dynamic Performance Control,
refer to page 90

Everything under control

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 74 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Displays on Control Display

Both displays show:

You can also access the computer using iDrive.

> The average speed and

1. "Vehicle Info"

> the average fuel consumption.

2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"

Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for the average speed
and average fuel consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. To confirm your selection, press the controller again.

Displays on the "Onboard info":

Resetting the Trip computer
You can reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"

Service requirements
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if:
> Entering a distance manually in the computer, see below.
> A destination was entered in the navigation system*, refer to page 141.
Displays on the "Trip computer":

The remaining driving distance and the date for
the next maintenance are displayed briefly with
the ignition switched on.
To determine the extent of maintenance
required, you can also display the remaining
distance or the service date individually in the
instrument panel.

> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
74
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 75 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving tips

1. With the ignition switched on, press the
knob in the instrument panel, refer to
page 71, for approx. 5 seconds until the
service requirements are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the
individual service requirement items.

Service requirements

Engine oil

Legally mandated inspections*

Front brake pads

Rear brake pads

Brake fluid

The sequence of the displayed maintenance
items can vary. First the data for the next maintenance are displayed.

Mobility

Knob for selecting display

75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Displaying service requirements

Everything under control

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 76 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

More information
Detailed information on service
requirements

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"

More information on the scope of service
required can be displayed on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

4. "§ Vehicle inspection"

3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry.

5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.

Select the entry and press the controller.

6. "Date:"

To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.

7. Create the settings.

Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. Please
arrange a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally
mandated inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 80; otherwise, the effectiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 244.

Automatic Service Notification*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center prior to a service due
date.

76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

means that a Check Control message has
been generated. The symbol continues to be
visible even when the Check Control message
disappears after a short time. The warning
lamps and text messages are stored and can be
displayed later, also refer to page 78.

4. "Last Service Request"

Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors functions in the
vehicle and issues a message if there is a malfunction in the monitored systems. This kind of
Check Control message consists of indicator
and warning lamps in the instrument cluster,
and if necessary an acoustic signal and text
messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Explanatory text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
For most Check Control messages, you can
view more information later, e.g. regarding the
cause of a malfunction and how to respond;
refer to the information provided below.

Indicator and warning lamps

In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Exit the displayed information:
Move the controller to the left.

Mobility

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in
different combinations and colors.

77
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

3. "Options"

Driving tips

2. "Vehicle status"

Navigation

1. "Vehicle Info"

Communications Entertainment

You can check when your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center was notified.

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 77 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything under control

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 78 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Hiding Check Control messages

Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"

Press the button in the turn signal lever up or
down.
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the malfunctions have been rectified. They
cannot be hidden. If a number of malfunctions
occur simultaneously, they are displayed in
succession.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

Displaying stored Check Control
messages

4. Select the text message.

Speed limit
You can enter a speed and a Check Control
message indicates when you have reached this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting, or changing speed
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
1. Press the button on the turn signal lever
downward. "CHECK OK" or the stored
Check Control messages appear in the display.
"CHECK OK" is shown if no messages are
present.
Check Control messages are accompanied
by text messages on the Control Display.
2. Press the button to display additional messages, the time and outside temperature, or
the date.

3. "Warning at:"

4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.

78
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Settings on Control Display

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"

Setting the time

3. "Select current speed"

The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

Driving tips

1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.

4. Press the controller.
The system applies your current speed as the
limit.

Controls

Applying your current speed as limit

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 79 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. "Settings"

Navigation

Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"

Communications Entertainment

3. "Warning"

3. "Time/Date"

4. Press the controller.
The limit warning is switched on.

5. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
6. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.

Mobility

4. "Time:"

79
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

The time is stored.

Everything under control

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 80 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Setting time format

Brightness of Control Display

1. "Settings"

The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.

2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.

1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"

Setting date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.

Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"

4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. In bright conditions, for example,
the brightness control may not be clearly visible.

Setting the units of measure

3. "Format:"

You can change the units of measure for consumption, distances, temperature and pressure.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"

4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.

3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

80
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

set language
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"

Volume of warning tones
You can raise or lower the volume of the warning signals, e.g. the safety belt reminder, in relation to the entertainment sound output. The
warning tones have a specified minimum and
maximum volume that cannot be dropped
below or exceeded.

Controls

Language on Control Display

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 81 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

1. "Settings"
2. "Tone"

Driving tips

3. "Volume settings"

4. Select the desired language.

Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.

> "Speed volume": adaptation of the volume as a function of vehicle speed
> "PDC": volume of the PDC* signal tone
in comparison to entertainment sound
output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g.
for the safety belt reminder, in comparison to entertainment sound output

Communications Entertainment

Setting the voice dialog

Navigation

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

81
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 82 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technology for comfort, convenience and
safety
PDC Park Distance Control*

Limitations of ultrasonic measurement

The concept

The detection of objects can come up against
the limitations of physical ultrasonic measurement, for example:

In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control,
the rear view camera*, refer to page 86, can
also be switched on.
PDC assists you during parking. A slow
approach to an object in front of or behind your
vehicle is announced by:
> Signal tones
> Optical displays

Measurement
Ultrasonic sensors in the bumpers carry out the
measurement.
Their range is approx. 7 ft/2 m.
The acoustic warning begins:
> at approx. 24 in/60 cm for the front* sensors and the two rear corner sensors.
> at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m for the middle sensors in the rear.

System limitations
PDC cannot replace the personal assessment of the traffic situation. Also make a
direct visual check of the traffic situation around
the vehicle. Otherwise, there could be a risk of
accident, for example due to other road users or
objects outside the detection range of PDC.
Loud sources of sound, inside and outside the
vehicle, could drown out the PDC signal tone.<
Avoid approaching an object too quickly.
Avoid starting off quickly while PDC is not
yet activated.
Otherwise, physical circumstances could cause
the system to issue a warning late.<

> when using tow bars and towing hitches
> in the presence of thin or wedge-shaped
objects
> in the presence of low objects
> in the presence of objects with corners and
sharp edges
Low objects that have already been displayed,
e.g. curbs, can disappear again from the detection area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds.
Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot
be detected.

False warnings
Under the following conditions, PDC may display a warning even though no obstacle is
present in the detection range:
> in heavy rain
> when the sensors are heavily soiled or icedover
> when the sensors are covered with snow
> on rough road surfaces
> in large, rectangular buildings with smooth
walls, e.g. underground garages
> in the presence of heavy exhaust
> due to the presence of other ultrasonic
sources such as street sweepers, steam
cleaners, or neon lamps.

Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.

82
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

The signal tone is switched off:

The system switches off and the LED goes out:

> when the vehicle is more than approx.
4.0 in/10 cm away from an object

> after approx. 165 ft/50 m when driving forward

> when the selector lever is in the P position

> at speeds over approx. 25 mph/35 km/h
when driving forward

Volume

Switch the system back on as needed.

You can adjust the volume of the signal tone,
refer to page 81.

Switching on/off manually

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Controls

Automatic deactivation

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 83 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display. Objects that are farther away
are displayed on the Control Display before a
signal tone sounds.

> On: LED lights up
> Off: LED goes out

Signal tones

If the last image selected was the rear view
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
PDC:

If the distance to the nearest object falls to
below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous
tone sounds.

1. Select the "Switch off rear view camera"
symbol
on the Control Display.

If objects are present both in front of and behind
the vehicle, then an alternating, continuous
tone sounds.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
> when the vehicle remains stationary in front
of an object that has only been detected by
one of the corner sensors
> when driving parallel to a wall

2. Press the controller.

Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
1. Select the "Switch on rear view camera"
symbol
.
2. Press the controller.
83

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

The shorter the distance to the object
becomes, the shorter the intervals become.

The display appears as soon as PDC is activated.

Reference

When nearing an object, the position is correspondingly indicated by an interval tone. Thus,
an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle
will be indicated by a signal tone from the left
rear speaker, etc.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Press the button.

Driving tips

Optical warning

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 84 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

System limitations
In the following situations, the function of
Top View is limited:
> when a door is open

Malfunction

> when the liftgate is open
> when the exterior mirrors are folded in
> under poor lighting conditions
The arrows next to the vehicle are displayed in a
shaded form on the Control Display and a symbol appears at the corresponding location on
the vehicle.

A Check Control message appears in the
instrument panel, refer to page 77.
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle
appear in shaded form on the Control Display.
PDC is malfunctioning. Have the system
checked.
In order to assure full functionality:
> Keep sensors clean and free of ice.
> Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure cleaners for long periods and keep the
spray nozzle at least 12 in/30 cm away from
them.

Also make a direct visual check of the
traffic situation around the vehicle. Otherwise, there could be a risk of accident, for example due to other road users or objects outside
the image range of the camera.<

Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
The images from Top View and PDC are displayed when the system has been switched on
using iDrive.

Automatic deactivation
The system switches off and the LED goes out:

Top View*

> after approx. 165 ft/50 m when driving forward

The concept

> at speeds over approx. 25 mph/35 km/h
when driving forward

Top View assists you when parking and maneuvering. To accomplish this, the door region and
road surface region are shown on the Control
Display.

Switch the system back on as needed.

Switching on/off manually

Detection
Detection is carried out by two cameras integrated into the exterior mirror and the rear view
camera.
The range is:
> approx. 7 ft/2 m to the side
> approx. 7 ft/2 m to the rear
Obstacles up to the height of the exterior mirrors are thus detected in a timely fashion.

Press the button.
> On: LED lights up.

84
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

The approach to an object can be shown on the
Control Display.
When the distance to an object is small, the
PDC display correspondingly shows a red bar in
front of the vehicle.

symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.

Contrast
With Top View switched on:
1. Select the

symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.

Displaying turning lines and pathway
lines
> The static, red turning line shows the lateral
space required when the wheel is fully
turned.

The display appears as soon as Top View is
activated.
If the last image selected was the rear view
camera, this is displayed again. To switch to
Top View:
1.

Select the "Switch off rear view camera"
on the Control Display.

2. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

> The variable, green pathway lines assist you
in estimating the amount of lateral space
actually required.
The pathway lines depend on the current
steering angle and are continuously
adapted to movements of the steering
wheel.
1. Select the

symbol.

2. Press the controller.
Turning lines and pathway lines are displayed.

Cameras

Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With Top View activated:

Controls

Optical warning

1. Select the

Driving tips

With Top View switched on:

Navigation

Brightness

If Top View is displayed, switch on the rear view
camera using iDrive, refer to page 87.

Communications Entertainment

> Off: LED goes out.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 85 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

1. Select the "Switch on rear view camera"
symbol
.
The lenses of the Top View cameras are on the
undersides of the exterior mirror housings.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.

85
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Mobility

2. Press the controller.

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 86 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Rear view camera*

> Off: LED goes out.

The concept

If PDC is displayed, switch on the rear view
camera using iDrive, refer to page 83.

The rear view camera assists you when parking
and maneuvering in reverse. To accomplish
this, the region behind your vehicle is shown on
the Control Display.

System limitations
Also make a direct visual check of the
traffic situation around the vehicle. Otherwise, there could be a risk of accident, for example due to other road users or objects outside
the image range of the rear view camera.<

Assistance functions
Function requirements
> Rear view camera is switched on.
> Liftgate is completely closed.

Pathway lines

The rear view camera is not able to detect
objects at greater heights or protruding
objects such as projections from walls.<

Automatic activation
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, shift the selector lever into position R.
The image of the rear view camera is displayed
when the system has been switched on using
iDrive.

Automatic deactivation
The system switches off and the LED goes out:

> Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera when the transmission is in
reverse.
> Help estimate the required amount of space
when parking and maneuvering on a flat
road surface.

> after approx. 33 ft/10 m when driving forward

> Depend on the current steering angle and
are continuously adapted to movements of
the steering wheel.

> at speeds over approx. 9 mph/15 km/h
when driving forward

To display parking aid lines using iDrive, refer to
page 87.

Switch the system back on as needed.

Turning lines

Switching on/off manually

> Can be displayed in the image of the rear
view camera.

Press the button.
> On: LED lights up.
86

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Several assistance functions can be active at
the same time.

1. Position the vehicle so that the turning lines
lead into the margins of the parking space.

Displaying parking aid lines
1.

Select the "Parking aid lines" symbol.

2. Press the controller.
Pathway and turning lines are displayed.

Displaying obstacle marking
1.

Select the "Display obstacle marking"
symbol.

2. Press the controller.
2. Turn the steering wheel so that the pathway
lines coincide with the corresponding turning line.

Three-dimensionally-shaped markings are displayed.

Image on the Control Display
Switching on the rear view camera
using iDrive
With PDC activated:
1.

Select the "Switch on rear view camera"
symbol.

2. Press the controller.

Obstacle marking

Controls

Activating assistance functions

Parking using pathway and turning
lines

The image of the rear view camera is displayed.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Brightness

Driving tips

To display parking aid lines using iDrive, refer to
page 87.

To display obstacle marking using iDrive, refer
to page 87.

Navigation

> When the steering wheel is turned, only one
turning line is displayed.

Their color gradation corresponds to the markings in PDC. This helps estimate the distance to
the object pictured.

Communications Entertainment

> Show the path of the smallest turning circle
on a flat road surface.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 87 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

With the rear view camera switched on:

> Three-dimensionally shaped markings can
be displayed in the image of the rear view
camera.
87
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.

Reference

1. Select the

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 88 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Contrast

Brake assistant

With the rear view camera switched on:
1. Select the

symbol.

2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.

Camera

When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the shortest possible braking distance during full braking. This system exploits all of the benefits provided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal
for the duration of the full braking.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control

The lens of the rear view camera is under the
grasping lip of the liftgate.
The presence of dirt can impair image quality.
Clean the lens with a moist, nonabrasive cloth.

Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW is equipped with an extended array
of systems designed to enhance and maintain
vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels
when starting off and accelerating. The system
also identifies unstable driving conditions, such
as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or
sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions in the individual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style remains the responsibility of the driver.
Therefore, do not restrict the additional safety
margin with a risky driving style, as otherwise
there is a risk of an accident.<

Deactivating DSC

ABS Antilock Brake System
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 132.

CBC Cornering Brake Control
When braking during curves or when braking
during a lane change, driving stability and steering response are improved further.

Electronic brake-force distribution

Press and hold the button until the indicator
lamp for DSC lights up and DSC OFF appears in
the instrument panel, but do not press the button for longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC
Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deactivated together. Stabilizing interventions are
now not carried out.

The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.

88
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

A message appears on the Control Display.
Please note any supplementary information
that appears there.

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or starting off in deep snow, sand or on loose
ground

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.

> When driving with snow chains*

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 89 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.

DSC deactivated:
The indicator lamp lights up and
DSC OFF appears in the instrument
panel.

Press the button: the indicator lamp for DSC
lights up and TRACTION appears in the instrument panel.

For better control
The indicator lamp flashes:
DTC is controlling the drive forces and
brake forces.
The indicator lamp lights up:
DSC and DTC are malfunctioning.
DTC activated:
The indicator lamp lights up and TRACTION appears in the instrument panel.

DSC and DTC deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving in sand, on snowy inclines, in
slush or on unplowed, snow-covered road
surfaces

Mobility

DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive output is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The system assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore necessary to drive with appropriate caution.
DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC
Press the button again: the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.

89
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

The indicator lamp lights up:
DSC and DTC are malfunctioning.

Navigation

For better control

Communications Entertainment

Press the button: the indicator lamp in the
instrument panel goes out.

Driving tips

Controls

Activating DTC

Activating DSC

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 90 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

xDrive

Malfunction

xDrive is the 4-wheel drive system of your
BMW. The combined effects of xDrive and DSC
further optimize the traction and dynamic driving characteristics. The 4-wheel drive system
xDrive variably distributes the drive forces to
the front and rear axle depending on the driving
situation and prevailing road conditions.

Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 77.

Dynamic Performance Control*
The concept
Dynamic Performance Control optimizes the
handling characteristics of your BMW when
starting off, cornering, and during evasive
maneuvers. To achieve this, the system variably
distributes the drive torque of the rear axle to
the two rear wheels. This further increases the
steering precision and tracking stability of your
vehicle.

Display
The Control Display shows how xDrive and
Dynamic Performance Control are distributing
the drive forces.

HDC Hill Descent Control
The concept
HDC is a system for driving downhill in steep
terrain. This system reduces vehicle speed on
steep downhill gradients, thus allowing you to
maintain even better control of your BMW
under these conditions. The vehicle moves at
approximately walking speed without active
intervention from the driver.
HDC is available for activation at vehicle speeds
below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving
down steep hills with a speed below approx.
22 mph/35 km/h, the vehicle reduces speed
automatically down to approximately walking
speed, approx. 5 mph/8 km/h, and then maintains this speed at a constant.
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.

Increasing or reducing speed
You can use the accelerator or brakes to vary
this automatically controlled speed within a
range extending from approx. 4 mph/6 km/h to
15 mph/25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range by using the lever of the cruise control.
With downhill grade over 10Ξ you can reduce
the speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h. Pull the
lever of the cruise control beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.

Press the BC button in the turn signal lever,
refer to page 73, until the display appears.
The current distribution of drive forces is indicated by arrows pointing to all four wheels.
The highlighted arrows show the drive forces
currently present. The longer an arrow is, the
greater the drive forces in the associated wheel.
The transparent arrows indicate the maximum
value the drive forces over the last 10 seconds.
1

Increasing speed

Pull to the resistance point:
Reduce speed to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h

90
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Adaptive Drive*
Press the button; the LED lights up.
The HDC display is shown in the instrument
panel.
The LED flashes when the brakes are applied
automatically.

Deactivating HDC
Press the button again. The LED and the HDC
display go out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds
over approx. 37 mph/60 km/h.

Displays* in instrument panel

The concept
Adaptive Drive reduces the body roll which
occurs when cornering quickly or during fast
evasive maneuvers. In addition, Adaptive Drive
reduces the steering angle requirement,
improves the running comfort and increases
the dynamic driving characteristics of your
BMW.

Chassis and suspension tuning
You can choose between two types of chassis
and suspension tuning.
> Normal:
The comfortable basic setting offers optimum comfort when traveling.

Display for target speed

HDC display
Mobility

> Sport:
The sporty basic setting offers increased
driving agility.

Controls

When driving on poor roads, avoid using
full throttle or pressing the accelerator
beyond the kick-down point and also avoid
heavy braking. Otherwise, the drive train may be
damaged or accidents can occur.<

Driving tips

Malfunction of driving stability control
systems

Activating HDC

Navigation

> The LED in the button and the HDC display
do not light up when the button is pressed.

Communications Entertainment

Pull beyond the resistance point:
With downhill grade over 10Ξ, reduce
speed to approx. 3 mph/4 km/h.

Malfunction
HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following
situations due to a high brake temperature:
> The LED in the button and the display HDC
go out during HDC operation.

91
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 91 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 92 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Selecting chassis and suspension
tuning

Self-leveling suspension*
The concept
The self-leveling suspension on the rear axle
assures a continuous ground clearance.
To do so, the height of the vehicle is measured
by sensors at both rear wheels.

Press the button.
The system switches between the two chassis
and suspension tuning settings.
> Sport:
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
is displayed in the instrument panel.
> Normal:
The LED in the button goes out.
The selection of the chassis and suspension
tuning setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.

If the actual height deviates from the defined
height, e.g. due to loading of the vehicle, then
this difference is compensated for very quickly.
In addition, spring motions resulting from cornering or irregularities in the road surface are
reduced to a minimum.
The system functions automatically.

Malfunctions
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 77.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor*
The concept

Starting assistant
The starting assistant enables you to start off
conveniently on slopes. The parking brake is
not required for this purpose.
1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
2. Release the footbrake and immediately
drive off quickly.
The starting assistant holds the vehicle
for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the
footbrake. Depending on the load, the vehicle
may also roll back slightly during this time.
After releasing the footbrake, immediately start
quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no
longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds
and it begins to roll back.<

The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in
one tire by comparing the speeds of the individual wheels during driving.
In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change
in the rolling circumference and therefore the
rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The
system detects this change and reports it as a
flat tire.

Function requirements
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must be initialized for the correct tire inflation pressure.
The initialization must be repeated after
each time the tire inflation pressure is corrected and after every tire or wheel change.<

System limits
The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate
sudden severe tire damage caused by
outside factors and does not detect a natural,
even pressure drop in all four tires.<

92
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Initializing system
The initialization finishes during driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is continued automatically. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains* or with the
compact wheel*.<

2. At the next opportunity, check the air pressure in all four tires.

1. "Vehicle Info"

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:

2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"

If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<

> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km

4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset".
6. Start to drive.
The initialization finishes during driving. "Status: Flat Tire Monitor active " is displayed again
on the Control Display.

Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamp lights up red. A
message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.
If you have deactivated DSC, it will be activated
automatically.

> With a full load:
4 or more persons, cargo bay full:
approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed
speeds of 50 mph/80 km/h or else you
run the risk of causing an accident. In the event
of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This
includes reduced tracking stability in braking,
extended braking distance and altered natural
steering characteristics.
If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while
the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final
failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and
stop at a suitable location as soon as possible,
otherwise pieces of the tire could become
detached and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, but instead contact the BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<
93

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Controls

If the vehicle is not equipped with runflat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 237, do not continue driving.
Continuing to drive with a flat tire could
cause severe accidents.<

Driving tips

> Driving with snow chains*
When you are driving with the compact wheel*
the Flat Tire Monitor is unable to function.

Navigation

> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels,
high lateral acceleration

Communications Entertainment

> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface

Mobility

> System has not been initialized

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
In case of further air loss of the defective
wheel, its position will be indicated to you
on the Control Display.

Reference

In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 93 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 94 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"

The system is inactive and cannot display a flat
tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM
electronics, e.g. a compact wheel*, or if TPM is
temporarily interfered with by other systems or
devices which use the same radio frequency.

2. "Vehicle status"

Status display on Control Display

3. "Flat Tire Monitor"

The tire and system status is indicated by the
color of the tires.
TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure
changes during driving into account. A correction is only required if requested by TPM with
the color.

Green
The tire pressure matches the learned set state.
The status is displayed.

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*
The concept
TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the
four mounted tires. The system reports when
the tire inflation pressure has dropped considerably in one or several tires.

"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Display.

One wheel is yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
the indicated tire. A message appears on the
Control Display.

All wheels are yellow
Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in
several tires. A message appears on the Control
Display.

Function requirements
In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat
tire, the system must have been reset with the
correct tire inflation pressure.

Gray

Always use wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise fault-free operation of the system is not
ensured.

> TPM is being reset

Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<

The system cannot detect a flat tire.
Reasons for this can be:
> Temporary interference due to systems or
devices which use the same radio frequency
> Malfunction

Resetting system

System limits
TPM cannot announce sudden serious
tire damage caused by external influences.<
The system does not function properly if it has
not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite
correct tire inflation pressures.

Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after
every tire or wheel change.<
Resetting finishes during driving, which can be
interrupted at any time. When driving resumes,
resetting is continued automatically.

94
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo bay full, or
4 persons without luggage:
approx. 95 miles/150 km

4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset TPM".
6. Start to drive.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After a few minutes of driving, the set tire inflation pressures in the tires are applied as the set
values to be monitored. Resetting finishes during driving. On the Control Display, the tires are
shown in green and "Status: TPM active " is
displayed again.
If a flat tire is detected during resetting
and applying the tire inflation pressures,
all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Display. The message "Low tire!" is shown.<

Message with low tire inflation
pressure
The warning lamp lights up yellow. A
message appears on the Control Display. In addition, an acoustic signal
sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation
pressure loss.

Status display
The current status of the TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g. whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"

Controls

> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
approx. 155 miles/250 km

Driving tips

3. "Reset TPM"

Navigation

2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss,
0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible
distance for continued driving on the basis
of the following guide values:

2. "Vehicle status"

Communications Entertainment

1. "Vehicle Info"

Continuing to drive with a flat tire could
cause severe accidents.<

2. "Vehicle status"
Mobility

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If the vehicle is not equipped with runflat tires as provided at the factory,
refer to page 237, do not continue driving.

95
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Do not reset the system when driving with a
compact wheel*.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 95 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 96 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"

The status is displayed.

Malfunction
The yellow warning lamp flashes and
then lights up continuously. The tires
are shown in gray on the Control Display and a message is displayed. No flat tire can
be detected.
A message like this is displayed in the following
situations:
> In case of a malfunction:
Have the system checked
> If a wheel without TPM electronics is
mounted, e.g. a compact wheel*
> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by
other systems or devices which use the
same radio frequency

Explanation according to the NHTSA/
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Systems
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle startups as long
as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Active steering*
The concept
The active steering actively varies the steering
angle of the front wheels in relation to the steering wheel movements. In addition, it also varies
the steering force required for steering depending on the vehicle's speed.
When you are driving in the low road speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steering angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes

96
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Brake force display*
BMW X5

Malfunction

On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.

BMW X6

Navigation

The warning lamp lights up yellow
and a message is shown on the Control Display. The active steering is
defective or has been temporarily
deactivated. At low speeds, greater steering
wheel movements are required, whereas at
higher speeds, the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements. The stability-promoting intervention can also be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive
defensively.

Deactivation
Active steering deactivates in order to carry out
an initialization. This deactivation is displayed
by means of a message. The initialization can
take several minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.

Driving tips

Controls

In critical situations, the system can make targeted corrections to the steering angle provided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes.

On the left: normal braking.
On the right: heavy braking.

Defect

97
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

In the event of a defect, a corresponding text
message is displayed. Have the system
checked.

Communications Entertainment

very direct. In the higher speed range, on the
other hand, the steering angle is reduced more
and more. This improves the handling capability
of your BMW over the entire speed range.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 97 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 98 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1

Front airbags

Head-level airbags in front and rear

Side airbags in backrests

Protective action
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side airbag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags are deliberately not triggered in
every impact situation, e.g. less severe accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the instrument cluster and window in the
region of the passenger seat free of foreign
materials, i.e. do not cover them with adhesive
film or covers and do not attach mounts, e.g. for
a navigation device or mobile phone to them.
Do not install cosmetic covers, seat cushions,
or other items on the front seats that are not
especially approved for seats with integrated
side airbags. Do not hang articles of clothing
such as jackets over the backrests.

Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint
system from the vehicle. Do not modify or
tamper with either the wiring or the individual
components in the airbag system. This includes
the upholstery in the center of the steering
wheel, on the instrument cluster, the doors, and
the roof pillars as well as the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the
steering wheel. Do not touch the individual
components immediately after the system has
been triggered, because there is a danger of
burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of airbag generators executed only by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel and has
the required explosives licenses. Otherwise
unprofessional attempts to service the system
could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag triggering, either of which could
result in personal injury.<
Warnings and information on the airbags is also
provided on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of front
passenger airbags
The occupation of the seat is detected by evaluating the impression on the occupied seat surface of the front passenger seat. The front and
side airbags on the front passenger side are
activated or deactivated accordingly by the system.
The current status of the front passenger
airbag, i.e. deactivated or activated, is

98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

> The indicator lamp does not light up when,
for example, a correctly seated person of
sufficient height is detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front passenger side are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not light up when
the seat is empty.
However, the front and side airbags on the
front passenger side are not activated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

Operating state of front passenger
airbags

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a child restraint device intended for the pur-

> Warning lamp does not light up from radio
readiness.
> Warning lamp lights up continuously.
Have the airbag system checked immediately in case of a malfunction, otherwise
there is a danger that the airbag system may not
respond in the expected manner in an accident
despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<
99

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

The indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags indicates the operating status of the front
and side airbags on the front passenger side
depending on the seat occupation. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger
airbags are activated or deactivated.

Airbag system malfunction

Reference

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.

From radio readiness, refer to page 59, the
warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the
operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the safety belt tensioners.

Controls

Most child's seats are detected by the
system. Especially the child's seats
required by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manufactured. After installing a child's
seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for
the front passenger airbags lights up. This
indicates that the child's seat has been
detected and the front passenger airbags
are not activated.<

Driving tips

Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety information and follow the instructions under Transporting children safely, refer to page 55.
When teenagers and adults assume certain sitting positions, this can cause the front and side
airbags to deactivate. The indicator lamp for the
front passenger airbags lights up when this
occurs. In these cases, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired status cannot be produced by changing
the sitting position, transport the corresponding person on the rear seat. Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or other
items onto the front passenger seat unless they
are specifically recommended by BMW. Do not
lay objects under the seat which could press
against the seat from below. Otherwise a correct evaluation of the occupied seat surface
cannot be ensured.<

Navigation

pose is properly detected on the seat.
The front and side airbags on the front passenger side are not activated.

Communications Entertainment

indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior
rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front
passenger airbags in the following.<

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 99 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 100 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Head-Up Display*

Selecting displays
1. "Settings"

The concept

2. "Head-Up display"

With the Head-Up Display important information is projected into the driver's field of view,
e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to
take in this information without looking away
from the road.

3. "Displayed information"
4. Select the desired displays in the Head-Up
Display.

The information is shown on the Head-Up
Display.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

Setting brightness

Switching on/off

The brightness of the display is automatically
adapted to the ambient lighting conditions.
However, you can change the base setting.
With the low beams switched on, the brightness
can also be adjusted with the thumbwheel of
the instrument lighting.

Press the button.

1. "Settings"
2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller.
The brightness is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

height adjustment
1. "Settings"
1

Navigation information or Check Control
messages

Cruise control

Speed

2. "Head-Up display"
3. "Height"
4. Turn the controller.
The height is adjusted.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

100
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 101 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Notes
The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Display is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters
> Certain sitting positions

Controls

> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Display
> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting
conditions

Driving tips

If the image is distorted, have the basic setting
checked at a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

Special windshield

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

The windshield is part of the system. The shape
of the windshield complies with the requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable a precise display. A film in the windshield prevents
the double images from being displayed.
Windshield replacement should be carried out
by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Care instructions
Important information on this topic is provided
on page 249.

101
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Display with a soft, lint-free cloth or with a
display cleaning cloth, otherwise damage may
result.<

Lamps

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 102 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams

response to changes in ambient light conditions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk
and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head
Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol
lights up when the low beams are on. You can
activate the daytime driving lamps, refer to
page 103. In the situations named above, the
system then automatically switches over to the
low beams.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be switched on.

Lights off and daytime driving lamps*

Parking lamps and daytime driving lamps*

Low beams and welcome lamps

Automatic headlamp control*, daytime
driving lamps*, welcome lamps, Adaptive
Head Light* and high-beam assistant*

The low beams remain switched on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you switch on the fog lamps*.<

If you open the driver's door with the ignition
switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off when the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.

The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the sensors
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low beams manually under these conditions.<

If necessary, switch on the parking lamps,
switch position 1.

Welcome lamps

Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps drain the battery. Do
not leave them switched on for long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer be possible to start the engine. It is better to switch on
the roadside parking lamps on one side, refer to
page 104.<

When parking the vehicle, if you leave the light
switch in position 2 or 3, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.

Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Welcome light"

Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control*
In switch position 3, the system activates the
low beams and switches them on or off in
102
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Welcome lamps are activated and are
stored for the remote control currently in use.

3. "Daytime running lamps"

Pathway lighting

Controls

If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.

Setting the duration or deactivating
1. "Settings"

Adaptive Head Light*
The concept
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

In sharp curves, e.g. serpentines, or during turning, up to a speed of approx. 45 mph/70 km/h
one of the two fog lamps* is switched on as a
turning lamp. This provides improved illumination of the area inside the curve.

Daytime driving lamps*

Activating Adaptive Head Light

The daytime driving lamps light up in position 0,
1 and 3. If the light switch remains in position 1,
the parking lamps light up after the ignition is
switched off.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive
Head Light directs light towards the front passenger side when the vehicle is at a standstill.
When driving in reverse, both turning lamps are
active.

103
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

2. "Lighting"

The turning lamps are automatically switched
on depending on the steering angle or the use
of turn signals.

Mobility

Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lamps

With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 102.

Navigation

4. Set a time of duration or 0 s to deactivate
the function.

Communications Entertainment

3. "Pathway light.:"

Driving tips

Daytime driving lamps are activated and are
stored for the remote control currently in use.

2. "Lighting"

1. "Settings"

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 103 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Lamps

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 104 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

High beams/
roadside parking lamps

vene at any time and switch the high beams on
and off as usual.

Activating system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 102.
2. With the low beams on, briefly press the
turn signal lever toward the high-beam setting.

High beams

Headlamp flasher

Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one
side of your vehicle when parking.

Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the resistance point for approx.
1 second, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for
long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer
be possible to start the engine.<

Switching off
Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction
up to the resistance point, arrow 3.

High-beam assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off again. The process is controlled by a sensor on the front side of the interior rearview mirror. The Assistant makes sure
that the high beams are switched on whenever
the traffic situation permits. This relieves you of
eyestrain and at the same time offers you the
best possible visibility. Naturally, you can inter-

The indicator lamp in the instrument
panel lights up when the high-beam
assistant is activated. The system
automatically switches the high beams on and
off, reacting not only to oncoming traffic and
traffic ahead, but also to sufficient illumination,
e.g. in built-up areas.

Switching high beams on and off
manually
If you wish or the situation requires it, you can
intervene at any time:
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the high beams, but you want to use low
beams, simply switch them on using the
turn signal lever. This deactivates the highbeam assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever toward the high-beam
position.
> If the high-beam assistant has switched on
the low beams, but you want to use high
beams, simply switch them on in the usual
way. This deactivates the system and you
must switch to low beams manually.
To reactivate the system, briefly press the
turn signal lever toward the high-beam
position.

104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

> Use the headlamp flasher as usual when the
low beams are on.

System limits
The high-beam assistant cannot replace
personal judgment about the use of high
beams. In situations that require it, you should
therefore switch to low beams manually; failure
to do so can constitute a safety hazard.<
High-beam assistant is activated and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.

> in extremely unfavorable weather conditions such as fog or heavy precipitation

Fog lamps*

Driving tips

In the following sample situations, the system
will not function or will only function to a limited
degree, possibly requiring the driver to react
personally:

> in sharp curves, on steep hilltops or dips,
when there cross-traffic, or in the presence
of half-concealed oncoming traffic on the
highway

> in the low speed range

First, switch on the parking lamps or the low
beams. The green indicator lamp in the instrument panel lights up whenever the fog lamps
are on.

> when the windshield in the region of the
interior rearview mirror is fogged, dirty, or
covered by stickers, decals, etc.

If the automatic headlamp control is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

> when the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor
on the front side of the interior rearview mirror with a cloth moistened with a little glass
cleaner.

Instrument lighting

Switching off using iDrive

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

> when you perceive poorly illuminated road
users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders, carriages, when rail or shipping
traffic is close to the road, or at deer crossings

> in poorly lit areas and in the presence of
highly reflective signs

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 105 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"

You can control the lighting intensity by using
the thumbwheel.

105
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

3. "High beam assistant"

Lamps

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 106 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Interior lamps
The interior lamps, footwell lamps*, door entry
lighting*, cargo bay lamps, and the courtesy
lamps* are controlled automatically.
With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located
in the door handles to illuminate the exterior
area before the doors.
To protect the battery, all lamps in the
vehicle are switched off approx. 15 minutes after radio readiness is switched off, refer
to Start/Stop button on page 59.<

Switching interior lamps on and off
manually

Press the button.
If you wish the interior lamps, footwell lamps,
door entry lighting and courtesy lamps to
remain switched off all the time, press the button for approx. 3 seconds.

Reading lamps

Reading lamps are provided in the front and
rear* adjacent to the interior lamps. Press the
button to switch the lamps on and off.

106
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 107 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Air for the upper body region, refer to Front
ventilation on page 111

Air to footwell

Automatic climate control with 2-zone control, refer to page 108
Automatic climate control with 4-zone control, refer to page 112

Mobility

Air toward the windshield and side windows

107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

Climate

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 108 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Automatic climate control with 2-zone control

Seat heating and ventilation, driver's
side 51

Temperature, left side of passenger compartment

10 Manual air volume, switching off automatic
climate control, residual heat

AUTO program

11 Rear window defroster

Temperature, right side of passenger compartment

12 Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Maximum cooling

Seat heating and ventilation, front passenger side 51

13 Air grill for interior temperature sensor –
please keep clear and unobstructed

14 Driver's side

Passenger side

> Air distribution, manual

> Accessing setting for ventilation temperature on the Control Display

> Accessing setting for ventilation temperature on the Control Display
8

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode

Switching cooling function on and off manually

The current setting for manual air distribution is
displayed on the Control Display.

A congenial climate

AUTO program

The AUTO program offers the optimum air distribution and air volume for virtually all conditions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you
only need to select an interior temperature
pleasant to you.

The AUTO program handles the
adjustment of air volume and air
distribution to the windshield and
side windows, in the direction of
the upper body and in the footwell.
It also adapts your instructions for the temperature to outside influences throughout the year.

The following sections contain more detailed
information on the available setting options.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile
settings on page 26.

The cooling is switched on automatically with
the AUTO program. At the same time, a condensation sensor controls the program in such
a way that window condensation is prevented
as much as possible.

108
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO program by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button.
When you press the button on the display of the
automatic climate control, the current setting
appears on the Control Display.

To accomplish this, the access the Ventilation
temperature setting manually via the buttons
for air distribution, refer to page 108, or via
iDrive.
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. Select "Driver ventilation" or "Front passenger ventilation".
4. Turn the controller to adjust the temperature.

Controls

Intensity of AUTO program

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 109 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> Turn toward red: warmer

– High

Temperature
Set the desired temperature individually on the driver's and front
passenger side.
The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly as possible
at any time of year, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then
keeps it constant.
In the highest setting you activate the maximum
heating capacity, regardless of the outside temperature. And in the lowest setting, the maximum cooling capacity.
When switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.<

Adapting Ventilation temperature
This function allows you to adapt the interior
temperature separately for the driver and passenger when the automatic climate control is
switched off.

Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Quickly remove ice and condensation from the windshield and front
side windows.
To do this, also switch on the cooling function.

Rear window defroster
The rear window defroster
switches off automatically after a
while. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, upper wires are used
as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Communications Entertainment

– Medium

Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by
pressing on the corresponding
side. You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air volume with the AUTO
button.

Use the controller on the Control Display to
adjust the ventilation temperature.
109
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

– Low

Reference

Navigation

Select the intensity of the AUTO program:

Driving tips

> Turn toward blue: colder

Climate

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 110 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Air distribution, manual
You can use various programs to separately
direct the emerging airflow to the driver and
passenger side of the vehicle interior.
> Upper body region
> Upper body region and footwell
> Footwell
> Driver's side: also the windshield, side windows, and footwell

Selecting program
Press the button repeatedly until
the desired program is shown on
the Control Display.

The cooling function is switched on automatically with the AUTO program.

Maximum cooling
Maximally cooled air is obtained as
quickly as possible at an outside
temperature above approx. 327/
06 and with the engine running.
The automatic climate control switches into the
recirculated-air mode at the lowest temperature. The maximum air volume flows out of the
air vents for the upper body. Therefore, open
these vents for maximum cooling.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air
control/recirculated-air mode
You can respond to pollutants or
unpleasant odors in the immediate
environment by suspending the
supply of outside air. The system
then recirculates the air currently within the
vehicle. During AUC operation, a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.

Air toward the windshield and side windows

Air for the upper body

Air to footwell
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the
manual air distribution settings.<

The automatic mode for the air volume remains
effective with manual air distribution.

Switching cooling function on and off
The cooling function cools and
dehumidifies the incoming air
before also reheating it as
required, according to the temperature setting.
This function is only available when the engine
is running.
The cooling function helps to avoid condensation on the window surfaces or to quickly
remove them.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog over briefly when the engine is started.

By pressing the button repeatedly, you can
request three operating modes:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left LED on, AUC mode: the system
detects pollutants in the outside air and
shuts off the supply as needed.
> Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the
supply of outside air is permanently shut off.
Should the windows fog up in the recirculated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
increase the air volume if necessary.
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
without interruption over an extended period of
time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<

Residual heat
The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the
passenger compartment, e.g. while stopped at
a school to pick up a child.

110
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Switching on

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 111 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Front ventilation

Pressing the right side switches on
the residual heat utilization when
the following conditions are met:

> with sufficient battery voltage
> at an outside temperature below 777/
256
REST appears on the display of the automatic
climate control when the residual heat utilization is switched on.
From radio readiness the interior temperature,
the air volume and the air distribution can be
set.

Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
air vents

Levers to change the air vent direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the
air vents, otherwise these could be catapulted outwards and lead to injuries.<

Driving tips

> with the engine at operating temperature

Controls

> up to 15 minutes after switching off the
engine

Set the air vents so that the air flows past you
and is not directed straight at you.

Ventilation in rear

You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the automatic climate control.

Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
air vents

Thumbwheel for adjusting the temperature
in the upper body region:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer

Communications Entertainment

You can select the lowest blower
speed by pressing and holding the
left side. Pressing again switches
off the automatic climate control.

Draft-free ventilation

Mobility

Switching automatic climate control on
and off

Adjust the air vents to direct the flow of cool air
in your direction, for instance, if the interior has
become too warm, etc.

Levers to change the air vent direction

111
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

You can select the lowest blower speed by
pressing and holding the left side. Pressing
again switches off the residual heat utilization.
REST disappears from the display of the automatic climate control.

Navigation

Ventilation for cooling

Switching off

Climate

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 112 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

BMW X5: heating and ventilation,
3rd row seats
The air in the area of the 3rd row seats can be
heated or recirculated. Air vents are located in
the storage compartment area between the
seats and in the footwell of the 3rd row seats.

Automatic climate control
with 4-zone control*
Front operation
Corresponds to the operation of the automatic
climate control with 2-zone control, refer to
page 108.

Rear operation
The control unit is located in the center console
in the rear.

Thumbwheel:
> Activating heating and distributing air in
footwell:
Turn toward front

> Distributing air in storage compartment
area between seats:
Turn toward rear

Temperature, left rear seating area

Button for switching on blower:
LED lights up

AUTO program

Display

Temperature, right rear seating area

Seat heating, right rear seat

Air volume, manual

Seat heating, left rear seat

The heating is not ready for operation
without switching on the blower. After the
heating is switched off, the blower can be used
to recirculate the air within the vehicle, e.g. at
high temperatures. To do this, turn the thumbwheel 1 toward the rear and switch on the
blower, button 2.<

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter removes dust and pollen from
the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter
provides additional protection by filtering gaseous pollutants from the outside air. This combined filter is changed during maintenance by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
You can select a display of more detailed information on the Control Display, refer to page 74.

The current setting for the temperature and the
air volume is shown on display 3.

Activating/deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Rear climate"

112
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Function is activated.
The rear automatic climate control
cannot be operated if the front automatic climate control is switched off. With
the defrost windows and eliminate condensation function activated, the rear automatic
climate control is also not ready for operation.<

The automatic climate control can also be
switched off with iDrive. To switch on the
automatic climate control again, the system
must first be reactivated, refer to Activating/
deactivating.<
You switch on the system again by pressing any
button of the rear automatic climate control.

Controls

4. Select the desired settings and press the
controller.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 113 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Ventilation in rear

When switching between different temperature settings in rapid succession, the
automatic climate control does not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature.<

Thumbwheels to adjust temperature in
upper body region; can be adjusted separately for left and right:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer

Levers to change the air vent direction

BMW X5

Air volume, manual
You can vary the air volume by
pressing on the corresponding
side. You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air volume with the AUTO
button.

Switching off rear automatic climate
control
You can select the lowest blower
speed by pressing and holding the
left side. Pressing again switches
off the automatic climate control.

Levers to change the air vent direction

Thumbwheel to smoothly open and close
air vents

For information on the ventilation of the 3rd row
seats, refer to page 112.

113
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation

The automatic climate control
adjusts this temperature as quickly
as possible at any time of year, if necessary with
the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and
then keeps it constant.

Communications Entertainment

Set the desired temperature individually on the left and right side.

Thumbwheels to smoothly open and close
air vents

Mobility

Temperature

Reference

The AUTO program assumes the
adjustment of the air distribution
toward the upper body and in the
footwell, as well as the air volume
for you. It also adapts your instructions for the temperature to outside influences
throughout the year.

Driving tips

AUTO program

Climate

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 114 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Parked-car ventilation*

Preselecting activation times
1. "Settings"

The concept

2. "Climate"

The parked-car ventilation blows air into the
passenger compartment to lower interior temperatures.

3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"

It is ready to use in the parked car mode at any
outside temperature.
You can set two different times for the system
to start. The parked-car ventilation can also be
switched on and off directly. It remains
switched on for 30 minutes.
Since the system uses a substantial amount of
electrical current, you should refrain from activating it twice in succession without allowing
the battery to be recharged in normal operation
between use.
The air emerges through the upper body region
air vents in the instrument cluster. Therefore,
please open the air vents.
The parked-car ventilation is operated via
iDrive.

Switching on and off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."

5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The activation time is activated.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control lights up.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes when the parked-car
ventilation has switched on.
The parked-car ventilation is only available for activation within the next
24 hours. Then it must be activated again.<
Only one activation time can be activated at a
time.

The parked-car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the display of the automatic
climate control flashes.

114
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Practical interior accessories
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<

Controls

Programming

To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the integrated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no people, animals or objects are within the travel
range of the device. Also, comply with the
safety precautions of the original hand-held
transmitter.<

Checking compatibility
If you see this symbol on the packaging
or in the manual supplied with the original hand-held transmitter, it is safe to
assume that it is compatible with the integrated
universal remote control.
Should you have additional questions,
please contact your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
Information is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.

Memory buttons

LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 59.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
press the left and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes quickly. All stored programs are
deleted.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at
a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the relevant system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit button
on the original hand-held transmitter and
the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2
flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2
flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the
LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx.
15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat
the step.
5. To program other original hand-held transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
115

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation

Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 116.

Communications Entertainment

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three memory buttons 1. Then with the ignition switched
on, this programmed memory button 1 can be
used to operate the respective feature. The
LED 2 flashes to confirm transmission of the
signal.

Driving tips

The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmitters for various remote-controlled accessories,
such as garage and gate or lighting systems.
The integrated universal remote control registers and stores signals from the original handheld transmitters.

Mobility

The concept

Reference

Integrated universal remote
control*

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 115 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Practical interior accessories

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 116 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device when the engine is
running or when the ignition is switched on.

Should you have questions, please contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<

If the device cannot be used after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmitter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control.
If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote
control flashes rapidly for a short time and then
remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this indicates
that the original hand-held transmitter uses an
alternating-code system. In the case of an alternating-code system, program the memory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code handheld transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the equipment to be set. You will find information there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, observe the
following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.

Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right-hand memory button 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes
quickly:
All stored programs are deleted.

Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at
a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/
30 cm from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the memory buttons 1 depends on the relevant system of the original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. When the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit button of
the original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat the step.

Digital compass*

2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1
of the integrated universal remote control
three times.

Adjustment button

Display

116
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 117 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The display indicates the cardinal or intercardinal direction in which you are currently driving.

Operating principle

Controls

You can run various functions by pressing the
adjustment button with a pointed object, e.g. a
ball-point pen etc. The following setting options
are displayed consecutively, depending on how
long the adjustment button is pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone

Driving tips

> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left/right-hand drive
vehicle
> 12 to 15 seconds: set language

To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjusting button repeatedly until the number of
the compass zone that applies to your current
position is displayed.

To set the compass zones, press the adjustment button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The display indicates the number of the currently set
compass zone.

The compass will be operational again after
approx. 10 seconds.

117
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Set the respectively applicable compass zone
in your vehicle so that the compass functions
properly, refer to the map of the world with
compass zones.

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Setting compass zones

Practical interior accessories

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 118 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Calibrating digital compass
Calibrate the digital compass In the following
situations:

ger of damage, and therefore a danger of injuries at higher speeds.<

> The wrong cardinal direction appears on
the display.

Glove compartment

> The cardinal direction displayed does not
change despite a change in the direction of
travel.

Opening

> Not all cardinal directions are displayed.

Procedure
1. Make sure that there are no large metal
objects or overhead power lines in the vicinity of your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Enter the currently applicable compass
zone.
3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
6-7 seconds to display C. Then drive in a
complete circle at least once at a maximum
speed of 4 mph/7 km/h.
If the calibration is successful, display C is
replaced with the points of the compass.

Setting right/left-hand drive vehicle
Your digital compass is already set to right or
left-hand drive vehicle to match your vehicle at
the factory.

Press the button. The covers open upward and
downward and the lighting in the glove compartment switches on.
To prevent injury in the event of an accident while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<

Closing
Press one of the two covers closed.

USB interface for data transmission

Setting language
You can set the language of the display.
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to change between English "E"
and German "O".
The setting is automatically stored after approx.
10 seconds.

Roller sun blinds for rear side
windows*
Pull the loop of the roller sun blind and hook
onto bracket.
Do not open the window with the roller
blind raised, as otherwise there is a dan-

Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 178.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.

118
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Clothes hooks

> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.

When hanging clothing on the hooks,
ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's
vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks.
If you do so, they could cause personal injury to
occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<

BMW X5
Clothes hooks are located near the grab handles in the rear.

Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the vehicle's speaker system:
> AUX-IN connection, refer to page 183
> USB audio interface, refer to page 183

Storage compartments

To fold out, press against upper edge.

Cup holders
Use lightweight, unbreakable containers
and do not transport hot beverages; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Do not force unsuitable
containers into the cup holders, as otherwise
damage can result.<

Front

Do not stow hard or sharp-edged objects
in the storage nets; otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury in the event of an accident.<

Mobility

Compartments are located in the doors, in the
center console in the front and rear* as well as
in the rear console in the X6.
Storage nets* are located on the backrests of
the front seats.

Navigation

Push cover down slightly and press the button.
The cover folds upward.

Driving tips

BMW X6

Opening cover

Communications Entertainment

A storage compartment is located under the
armrest between the front seats and, depending on the vehicle's equipment, also a cover for
the mobile phone bracket or the snap-in
adapter. Also refer to page 202.

Slide the cover back.

119
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Center armrest front

Controls

> Do not connect USB hard disks.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 119 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Practical interior accessories

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 120 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Rear

BMW X6

BMW X5

Slide the cover forward.
Unlock the center armrest with the button in the
lower section of the opening and fold down.

Remove the beverage container before
folding the rear seat backrest forward or
using the ski bag; otherwise it may cause damage.<

Ashtray
Front

Press the button; the cover folds forward.
With the 3rd row seats*:

To open the cover, slide it forward.

Rear
BMW X6
Fold down the center armrest.
Press the button; the cup holders are opened.
The cup holders of the 3rd row seats are
located in the center console between the
seats.

Slide the cover back.
Remove the insert to empty.
120
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Connecting electrical devices

Front

Sockets
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a
power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum
cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to
approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the
socket due to inserting plugs of different
shapes or sizes. The same is true for all power
outlets in the vehicle.

Driving tips

In cargo bay

Rear

Access to socket:
Fold open the cover.

In rear center console

Refer to Cigarette lighter, front.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment package, the socket in the rear is covered with a cap
or equipped with a lighter. Refer to Cigarette
lighter, front, page 121.

Mobility

Access to socket:
Remove cap or lighter.

Communications Entertainment

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
Always take along the remote control when you
leave the vehicle, otherwise children could, for
example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Navigation

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops
back out.

121
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Press in the lighter with the engine running or
the ignition switched on.

Controls

Lighter

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 121 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Practical interior accessories

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 122 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

In storage compartment under center
armrest

Access to socket*:
Pull off the cover.

BMW X6: in rear console

BMW X5 without 3rd row seats*

Unlock the center armrest with the button in the
lower section of the opening and fold down.

Cargo bay
BMW X5: roll-up cover

Slide the cover back.
Access to socket:
Pull off the cover.

Pull out the roll-up cover and hook it into the
brackets.

Rear center armrest
BMW X6 and BMW X5 with 3rd row
seats*

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
roll-up cover. If you do so, they may
already pose a danger to vehicle occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.
Do not allow the roll-up cover to snap back, otherwise it can be damaged.<

Pull on the loop and fold down the center armrest.

122
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Deploy cargo bay cover by pulling back.

Installing

Do not place heavy or hard objects on the
cargo bay cover. If you do so, they may
pose a danger to vehicle occupants during
braking or evasive maneuvers.<

When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.

Removing

1. Lay on the case on the left-hand side and
push it forward, arrow 1.
2. Swing the case toward the inside, refer to
arrow 2.
3. Push the case forward at the ends until it
engages in the two side brackets.

1. Grasp retracted cargo bay cover underneath the upper fold on both sides.
2. Pull the cover back out of the side brackets.
3. Depending on your vehicle's equipment
package, you can store the cover under the
floor panel in the cargo bay.

123
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

4. Check whether the case is properly locked
in place by pulling it with a sudden movement.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. Swing the case somewhat to the left,
arrow 2, and remove.

Controls

BMW X6: cargo bay cover

1. Unlock the case with the button, arrow 1.

Driving tips

Removing

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 123 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Practical interior accessories

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 124 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Installing
When installing, proceed in the opposite order
of removal.
1. Set the cargo bay cover into place on the
left and right sides.
2. Lift the back of the cover slightly and slide
forward until it snaps into the two side
brackets.

Expanding cargo bay
The rear seat backrest is divided. You can fold
down both sides separately in order to expand
the cargo bay.
BMW X6: before folding the rear seat
backrest forward or using the ski bag,
remove beverage containers from the cup
holder and close the cup holder.<

Storage compartments in
cargo bay
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following storage compartments are provided in
the cargo bay.
> Storage compartments behind the removable side panels on the right and left side of
the cargo bay* and under the floor panel
flap, storage compartment* right side of
cargo bay.
> Storage tray* under the floor panel flap,
capacity approx. 21 US gal/80 liter.
> Retaining straps* on the left and right side
panel for securing small objects.
> Lashing rail with lashing eyes*. You can
secure heavy-duty cargo straps on the lashing eyes.
They can be removed at the notches in the
rails. To move the lashing eyes, press the
button.
Read and comply with the information
enclosed with the heavy-duty cargo
straps.<

Floor panel flap
Reach into the recess and pull toward the front.
When you fold back the backrest, be sure
that the catch engages securely. The red
warning indicator disappears in the recess
when the catch is engaged. If it is not properly
engaged, transported cargo could enter the
passenger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.<
To ensure that the safety systems continue to provide optimized protection,
observe the safety belt information on
page 43.<

To access the onboard toolkit etc.
To open, swing up the flap by the handle, refer
to arrow.
The floor panel flap can be locked*.

Adaptive fixing system*
The adaptive fixing system is used to divide up
the cargo bay. It consists of two brackets with a
telescopic rail and retaining straps. These are
guided into the two rails on the cargo bay floor.

124
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Before using the adaptive fixing system,
fold up and lock the rear seat backrest;
otherwise, the cargo could be thrown into the
vehicle interior in an accident.<

Positioning cargo between telescopic rail and
retaining strap:
1. Lay the cargo on the telescopic rail. Press
the button, arrow 1, and route the retaining
strap around the cargo, arrow 2.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 125 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Telescopic rail

Notch in the cargo bay rail

Mounting brackets
The two brackets are connected with a telescopic rail.
1. Insert the brackets at the respective notch
in the rail on the cargo bay floor.
2. Press down the brackets to push them into
the desired position.
3. Check the firm seating of the brackets.
They must be clearly heard to engage.
Do not lay cargo on the brackets, as otherwise they could be unlocked.<

Dividing up cargo bay

Removing brackets
Press down the brackets, slide them up to the
notches of the rails and remove them.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment package, you can store the adaptive fixing system
under the floor panel in the cargo bay.

Ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to 2 snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft/
2.10 m in length are loaded, the ski bag will tend
to contract, reducing its overall capacity.
Before loading the ski bag, fold in the display screen of the DVD system in the
rear*, as otherwise the display screen could be
damaged.<

You can position the cargo as follows:
> between the rear seat backrest and the
telescopic rail
> between the telescopic rail and the retaining strap
125
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Driving tips

Navigation

Brackets

Communications Entertainment

When you are finished using the adaptive fixing
system, unhook the retaining strap and guide it
back into the bracket in order to prevent damage and injury.
Then slide the fastening system toward the
front in order to permit the best possible use of
the cargo bay.

Mobility

You can also hook both retaining straps
into each other.<

Reference

3. Press the button of the bracket, arrow 1.
The retaining strap is tensioned.

Controls

2. Hook the retaining strap into the mount 3
on the telescopic rail.

Practical interior accessories

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 126 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Securing cargo

1. Fold down the center armrest, press the
button and open the cover.

2. Press the button again; the cover in the
cargo bay opens. If you press the button
firmly the first time, this cover also opens.
3. Extend the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zipper facilitates access to the
stowed items and drying of the ski bag.
4. BMW X5: insert the latch plate of the ski bag
retaining strap into the center safety belt
buckle that is marked CENTER.

BMW X6: attach the hook of the ski bag
retaining strap to the eyelet on the rear seat
backrest.

After loading, secure the ski bag and its contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to
do so, it could endanger occupants during braking or evasive maneuvers.<
To store the ski bag, perform the above steps in
reverse order.

Removing ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to put it to other
uses.

1. Pull the handle toward the front, arrow 1.
2. Take out the ski bag upward, arrow 2.
3. Close the cover in the cargo bay.
Details on various inserts are available
from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.

126
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 127 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 128 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 129 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving tips
This section is designed to provide you
with extra support by supplying information
useful in dealing with specific driving
and operating conditions.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Things to remember when driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 130 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. To ensure that your vehicle continues to provide optimized economy of operation
throughout an extended service life, we request
that you devote careful attention to the following section.

Following part replacement
Observe the break-in instructions again if components mentioned above must be replaced
after subsequent driving operation.

Saving fuel

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km

The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on various factors. Through a few simple steps,
your driving style, and regular maintenance, you
can have a positive influence on your fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Drive at various engine and vehicle speeds, but
do not exceed:

Removing unnecessary cargo

Engine and rear axle differential
Always obey all official speed limits.

> Gasoline engine
4,500 rpm or 100 mph/160 km/h
> Diesel engine
3,500 rpm or 90 mph/150 km/h
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kick-down mode during these
initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.

Tires

Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Removing add-on parts after use
Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear
luggage racks after use. Add-on parts attached
to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and
increase the fuel consumption.

Closing windows and glass sunroof*/
panorama glass sunroof*
An open glass sunroof/panorama glass sunroof
or open windows likewise increase the drag
coefficient and therefore the fuel consumption.

Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the
first 200 miles/300 km.

Checking tire inflation pressures
regularly

Brake system

An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases
the rolling resistance and thus increases the
fuel consumption and tire wear.

Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during
this break-in period.

Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as
needed at least twice a month and before long
trips.

Driving off immediately
Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it
running while the vehicle remains stationary.
Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine

130
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Taking advantage of coasting
The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting.

Switching off engine during longer
stops
Switch off the engine at longer stops such as
traffic signals, railroad crossings, or in traffic
congestions. You achieve fuel savings even if
the standing time is as short as approx. 4 seconds.

Switching off functions currently not
required
Functions such as air conditioning, seat heating, or rear window defrosting consume a lot of
energy and require additional fuel. Their influence is particularly pronounced in city traffic
and stop & go operation. For this reason, it is a
good idea to switch these functions off when
they are not really needed.

Having maintenance carried out
Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to
achieve the optimum economy and service life
of your vehicle. BMW recommends having the
maintenance performed by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center. Also pay attention to
the BMW maintenance system, refer to
page 244.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic climate control to a high level, refer to
page 109.

Hot exhaust system
As in all vehicles, extremely high temperatures are generated on the exhaust system. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to
them. When driving, standing at idle and while
parking take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it
the risk of serious property damage as well as
personal injury. Do not touch hot tailpipes, as
otherwise there is a danger of burns.<

Diesel particulate filter*
Soot particles are collected in the diesel particulate filter and periodically burned away at high
temperatures. This cleaning process lasts a few
minutes. You will notice it sometimes by the
fact that the engine temporarily runs slightly
less smoothly and requires a slightly higher
engine speed to delivery the usual power. You
may also hear sounds and observe a slight
amount of smoke coming from the exhaust up
to even a few moments after the engine is
switched off.

131
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Controls

1. Close all windows as well as the glass sunroof*/panorama glass sunroof*.

Driving tips

Driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear.

If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the liftgate open:

Navigation

Avoiding high engine speeds

Operate the vehicle only when the liftgate
is completely closed. Otherwise, exhaust
fumes could enter into the passenger compartment.<

Communications Entertainment

Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
To do so, maintain the appropriate distance
from the vehicle in front of you. An anticipatory
and smooth driving style reduces fuel consumption.

Closing liftgate

Mobility

Thinking ahead when driving

General driving notes

Reference

speed. This is the fastest way for the cold
engine to reach its operating temperature.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 131 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Things to remember when driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 132 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Hydroplaning

Hills

When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplaning, and is characterized by a partial or
complete loss of contact between the tires and
the road surface, ultimately undermining your
ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<

To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal
can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and
possibly even brake failure.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread
depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Minimum tread depth on page 236.

Driving through water
Maximum water depth:
> BMW X5 20 in/50 cm
> BMW X6 17 in/45 cm
Only drive through water up to the abovementioned depth at no greater than walking speed; otherwise, the engine, electrical system, and transmission can be damaged.<

Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. In situations that require it, it is best to
brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
brake pedal. Even light but consistent
pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures,
brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.

The braking effect of the engine can be further
increased by downshifting in the manual mode
of the automatic transmission, if necessary into
first gear, refer to page 65. This prevents an
excessive strain on the brakes.
Do not drive in idle or with the engine
stopped, otherwise there will be no
engine braking action or support of the braking
force and steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area of movement
of the pedals and impair their operation.<

Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.

When vehicle is parked
Condensation forms in the automatic climate
control system during operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.

132
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Load

The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
YYY lbs. or XXX kg. Otherwise, this could
damage the vehicle and produce unstable
vehicle operating conditions.<

Navigation

BMW X5:

1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard*:

BMW X6:

2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from YYY lbs. or XXX kg.
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage
can be transported.

Mobility

4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs.:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.

Controls

Determining loading limit

Driving tips

Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
bay; otherwise the vehicle could be damaged.<

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

Communications Entertainment

To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never overload the vehicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. The ultimate result
can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.

133
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 133 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Things to remember when driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 134 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Stowing cargo

> When transporting very heavy cargo with
unoccupied rear seats, insert the safety
belts, the outer safety belts in the BMW X5,
into the buckles on the opposite sides.

BMW X5

> Do not pile objects higher than the top edge
of the backrest.
> Wrap sharp-edged or pointed objects
which could strike the rear window while
driving.

Securing cargo
BMW X5

BMW X6

> Use the luggage net*, retaining straps*, or
securing straps to hold down small and
lightweight luggage and cargo.
> For larger and heavier pieces, heavy-duty
cargo straps* are available from your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center. Four lashing
eyes* mounted in the cargo bay are used to
secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer
to illustrations.
> Load heavy cargo as far forward and as low
as possible, placing it directly behind the
backrest.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.

> Observe the special instructions supplied
with the heavy-duty cargo straps.
Position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-

134
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
its handling and steering response. You should
therefore always remember not to exceed the
approved roof load capacity, the approved
gross vehicle weight or the axle weights when
loading the rack.
You can find the specified weights under
Weights on page 271.
The load on the roof must be evenly distributed
and must not extend outward beyond the limits
of the loading surface. Always stow the heaviest
pieces on the bottom. Be sure that adequate
clearance is maintained for raising the glass
sunroof*/panorama glass sunroof* and that
objects do not project into the opening path of
the liftgate.
Secure roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.

> Familiarize yourself with the vehicle before
driving off and avoid taking risks at all costs.
> Adapt your driving speed to the road conditions. The steeper and rougher the road
surface is, the lower the speed should be.
> If you want to drive on very steep uphill or
downhill gradients, make sure beforehand
that the engine oil and coolant levels are
near the MAX mark, refer to page 240.
BMW X5: you can operate your vehicle on
uphill and downhill gradients with a maximum slope of 50%.
> On very steep downhill slopes, use Hill
Descent Control HDC, refer to page 90.
BMW X5: it is possible to start off on inclines
of up to 33%. The permissible body roll is
50%.
> While driving, watch carefully for obstacles
such as rocks or holes. Try to avoid these
obstacles whenever possible.
> Make sure that the undercarriage does not
touch the ground, for example on crests and
bumpy roads. The ground clearance of the
vehicle is a maximum of approx. 8 in/20 cm.
Please note that the ground clearance can
vary depending on loading and the driving
conditions of the vehicle.
> Only drive through road surface water up to
a maximum water depth of
> BMW X5 20 in/50 cm
> BMW X6 17 in/45 cm
and only drive at walking speed; do not
remain stationary.

Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
135
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Controls
Driving tips

When you are driving on poor roads, there are a
few points which you should strictly observe for
your own safety, for that of your passengers,
and for the safety of the vehicle:

Navigation

Loading roof-mounted luggage rack

Do not drive on unpaved terrain, as otherwise the vehicle may be damaged.<

Communications Entertainment

A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Please comply with the precautions included with the installation instructions.

Your BMW is at home on all roads and surfaces.
It combines a 4-wheel drive system with the
advantages of a normal passenger car.

Mobility

Roof-mounted luggage rack*

Driving on poor roads

Reference

ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or evasive maneuvers are necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle weights,
refer to page 271, as excessive loads can pose
a safety hazard, and may also place you in violation of traffic safety laws.
You should never transport unsecured heavy or
hard objects in the passenger compartment, as
they could fly around and pose a safety hazard
to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt braking or evasive maneuvers.
Use only the lashing eyes pictured to fasten the
heavy-duty cargo straps. Do not secure cargo
with the attachment points for the top tether,
refer to page 56; otherwise they could be damaged.<

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 135 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Things to remember when driving

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 136 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> After driving through water at low speed,
lightly press the brake pedal several times
to dry the brakes and to prevent the braking
effect from being reduced by wetness.
> Depending on the condition of the surface,
it may be practical to briefly activate DTC,
refer to DTC Dynamic Traction Control on
page 89.
> If the drive wheels spin on one side, depress
the accelerator pedal sufficiently so that the
driving stability control systems can distribute the drive forces to the individual wheels.
Please note the following points after driving on
poor roads to maintain the driving safety of your
BMW:
> Clean the coarsest dirt from the body.
> Clean mud, snow, ice etc. from the wheels
and tires and check the tires for damage.

136
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

137
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 137 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 138 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 139 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation system

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 140 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Navigation system*
General information
With the help of satellites, the navigation system is able to ascertain the precise position of
the vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.

Updating the navigation data
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert navigation DVDs into the DVD player
with the printed side up.

Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.

2. Follow the instructions on the Control Display.

Enter data only with the vehicle stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. Failure to take to this precaution can
place you in violation of the law and put vehicle
occupants and other road users in danger.<

3. Enter the activation code of the navigation
DVDs and switch DVDs if necessary.

Removing navigation DVD

Updating the navigation data
General information
Navigation data and an activation code can be
obtained from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Updating the data can take several hours,
depending on the volume of data.
> The data are updated as you drive.
> The updating process continues automatically when you resume driving.

1. Press the button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is possible that it is blocked. In this case a message is
also shown on the Control Display.

Displaying information on the version

> All functions remain available as you drive.

1. "Navigation"

> Data are stored on the hard drive or in the
internal memory.

2. Open "Options".

> After the updating process is complete, the
system restarts.

3. "Navigation system version":
Information on the data version is displayed.

> The medium with the navigation data can
be removed after the update.

140
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 141 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
among the following options:

3. "Enter address"

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 146
> Selecting home address, refer to page 144
> Entering destination via voice*, refer to
page 147
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20.
Enter data only with the vehicle stationary, and always give priority to the applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road conditions
and the instructions issued by the navigation
system. If you do not observe this precaution,
you can endanger the vehicle occupants and
other road users.<

Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 149. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically, so that stored names can
be called up quickly.

The system also supports you with the following features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system will
guide you to the downtown area of a town or
city.
> You can skip the entry of country and town/
city if the current entries should be retained
for your new destination.

Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.

Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city, or select letters.

Navigation

> Special destinations, refer to page 144

Communications Entertainment

> Last destinations, refer to page 144

Driving tips

Controls

> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 143

1. Press the MENU button.

141
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

2. "Navigation"

Destination entry

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 142 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Delete letters, if necessary:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select
then press the controller.

If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
, and

> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select
, and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
> To enter spaces:
Select the
symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
2. Move the controller to the right.
3. Select the name of the town/city from the
list. The three destinations stored last are
displayed.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is
displayed.
3. Select the town/city.

2. Highlight the street: a preview map is displayed.
3. Select the street.

Entering a street without a destination
town/city
You can also enter a street without entering a
town/city of destination. In this case all streets
of the entered country are offered for selection.
The related town/city is displayed after the
street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
undo this entry. This may be practical if the
desired street does not exist in the entered destination, because, for example, it belongs to
another part of the town/city.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. "In" the state/province currently displayed.

Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the displayed town/city.
2. Select the

symbol.

3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight postal code: a preview map is displayed.
6. Select the postal code.

Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would
the town/city.
After the street you can also enter the intersection or the house number.

6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street: a preview map is displayed.
9. Select the street.

Entering house number
You can enter any house number stored in the
navigation data for the street.
1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.

142
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.

Selection after destination entry

1. Open "Options".

> "Accept destination"
Destination guidance starts immediately.

2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".

> "Route preference"
refer to page 150.
> "Points of Interest at loc."
refer to page 144.

Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these addresses have been checked as
destinations.
If the contacts with addresses are not displayed by the mobile phone, then they must
first be checked as destinations, refer to
page 214.

3. Select a contact from the list or, if necessary, using "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".

3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"

Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".

4. Depending on the selection, select an existing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"

143
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation

To create contacts, refer to page 213.

Communications Entertainment

Address book

Driving tips

If a new town/city is selected during destination
guidance, the current destination guidance is
terminated.

Controls

Storing a destination in the address
book

Mobility

4. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.

Reference

3. Change to the list of house numbers.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 143 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Destination entry

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 144 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Editing or deleting an address

3. Select the destination.

1. "Navigation"

Destination guidance is started.

2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".

Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"

Using home address as destination

2. "Last destinations"

The home address must be stored as a destination. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home
address, page 213.

3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"

1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"

Deleting the last destinations

3. "Home"

1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destinations".

Special destinations
Destination guidance is started.

You can search for a special destination, e.g. a
hotel or place of interest, and start destination
guidance to the corresponding location.

Last destinations

The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.

The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.

The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of navigation data you are using.<

Accessing last destinations
1. "Navigation"

Accessing search for special
destinations

2. "Last destinations"

1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"

144
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Special destination location
Search for a special destination according to its
location relative to a locality or route.
1. "Search area"

Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search" after the criteria have been
defined.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 145 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> "At destination"
> "At a different destination"
> "Along route"

> Special destinations "At destination",
"At a different destination", "Along
route" are listed according to their distance from the location where the search
is being performed.

Special destination category

3. Highlight the special destination: the destination is displayed in the preview map.

1. "Category"

4. Select the special destination.

2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g.
hotels or restaurants.

5. Select the

Category details
For some special destinations, it is possible to
display additional details that are recorded in
the navigation data, e.g. restaurant type: Italian.

Destination entry using BMW Assist*
The concierge service, refer to page 216,
selects a desired address and transmits it for
direct adoption into the navigation system.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Open "BMW Assist dest. entry".

Entering special destinations by name
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Enter the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a maximum of 100 entries.

145
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

1. "Navigation"

Reference

"Category details"

symbol: "Start guidance".

6. If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.

Driving tips

> "At current location"

Navigation

2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination:

> Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map display as symbols. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.

Communications Entertainment

> Special destinations "At current location" are listed according to their distance from the current location and are
displayed with a directional arrow pointing to the destination.

Controls

2. A list of the special destinations is displayed.

Destination entry

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 146 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

5. Change to the list of special destinations.
6. Highlight the special destination. The destination is displayed in the preview map.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the

symbol: "Start guidance".

Entering the destination via
map
If you only know the location of the town or
street, you can enter the destination using the
map.

Displaying special destinations in the
map

Accessing map

To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:

2. "Map"

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"

1. "Navigation"
A map section is displayed on the Control Display. The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.

Selecting the destination
1. Select the
started.

symbol. The interactive map is

5. Select the settings.

Importing special destinations

2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.

1. "Navigation"

> Changing scale: turn the controller.

2. "Points of Interest"

> Moving map: move the controller in the
corresponding direction.

3. Open "Options".
4. "Import (USB)" via the USB interface in
the glove compartment or "Import (BMW
Search)"*

Deleting special destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete my Points of Interest"
5. "Yes"

> Shifting map diagonally: move the controller in the corresponding direction and
turn the controller.
3. Press the controller to display other menu
items.
4. If you wish, select the
"Start guidance".

symbol:

Specifying the street
If the system does not detect any street, then a
street name in the vicinity or the coordinates of
the destination are displayed.

146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Interactive map

Speaking the entry aloud

In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:

> Countries, towns/cities, streets, and intersections can be either spoken aloud as an
entire words or spelled in the system language, refer to page 22.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 147 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> Speak the letters smoothly and avoid
excessive emphasis and pauses.

Entering an address
1. Press the

> "Display destination"
The map section around the destination
is displayed.
> "Display current location"
The map section around your current
location is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 144.

Entering destination via
voice*
General information
You can enter a desired destination with the
voice activation system. When entering the
destination, it is possible to change between
voice command and iDrive at any time. Reactivate the voice command system for this purpose if necessary.
You can use {Voice commands} to have
the possible commands read aloud to
you.<

3. Wait for the system prompt.
4. Say the desired address in the suggested
form.
5. Continue entering as prompted by the system.
6. If necessary, say the parts of the address
individually, e.g. town/city.

Entering a town/city
The town/city can be spelled or entered as an
entire word*.
The entry possibilities depend on the particular navigation data as well as the
country and language settings.<
1. {City} or {Spell city}.
2. Wait for the system prompt for the town/
city.
3. Say the name of the town/city or if necessary, spell at least the first three letters.

Navigation

> Map display

Communications Entertainment

> "Exit interactive map"

button on the steering wheel.

2. {Enter address}

Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cities are suggested.
4. Select city/town:
> Choose selected city/town: {Yes}
> Select other city/town: {New entry}
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry 2}

Mobility

symbol: "Start guidance".

> Spell the entry: {Spell city}

147
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

> Select the

Driving tips

> Spell the entry if the language of the area is
different from the system language.

Controls

> Town/city, street, and house number can
also be spoken aloud in one sentence.

Destination entry

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 148 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Similar-sounding towns/cities that cannot be differentiated by the system are
compiled in a separate list and displayed as a
town/city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired city/town in this list.<

4. "Enter new destination"

The town/city can also be selected from the list
using iDrive: turn the controller until the desired
town/city is displayed and press the controller.

Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
way as the town/city.

Entering house number
You can enter house numbers up to the
number 999:

5. "Enter address"

Entering intermediate destinations
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"

1. {House number}

2. "Enter address using:"

2. Say the house number.

3. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.

3. {Yes} to confirm the house number and
start destination guidance.

Starting destination guidance
{Start guidance}
Destination guidance starts immediately.

Saving destination
The destination is added to the destination list
and is displayed in the list of last destinations.

Trip planner
The trip planner can be used to plan a trip with
several legs to different destinations.

New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip.

5. If applicable, select "Add as another dest.".

Starting the trip
After all of the intermediate destinations are
entered, access a stored trip directly "Accept
destination" or via "Stored trips".

Storing a trip

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the

4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted: "Reposition
dest. in the trip".

symbol: "Guidance"

Up to 30 planned trips can be stored in the trip
list.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the letters.

148
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

These functions are not available for imported
trips.

Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations are displayed in
reverse order in the list.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Reverse order of trip dest."

Instead of "München", you can also enter
the English spelling "Munich" or the Italian
spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns/
cities and streets the system will complete
them automatically as soon as enough letters are available to ensure unambiguous
identification.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. The system will not accept non
existent names and addresses.

Options for intermediate destinations
1. "Destination in the trip"

Controls

Changing trips

Example:

Driving tips

The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 149 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Select an intermediate destination.
Navigation

3. Select option:
> Shift the intermediate destination in the
list:
"Reposition dest. in the trip"

Communications Entertainment

> Delete intermediate destination:
"Delete dest. in the trip"

Deleting a trip
1. "Stored trips"
2. Select the desired trip.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".

Word-matching principle

> Names of specific locations can also vary
from the official versions if you are using a
spelling that is customary in another country.

149
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

The system supports the word matching principle to make it easier for you to enter the names
of streets or towns/cities. The system runs
ongoing checks, comparing your destination
entries with the data stored in the vehicle as the
basis for instant response. The user benefits
include:

Destination guidance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 150 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"

that you would choose based on personal experience.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.

Changing route criteria

4. "Accept destination"

1. "Navigation"

When the route has been calculated, it is displayed in the map on the Control Display.

2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:

Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the

symbol.

> "Fast route": a route that is time-optimized by combining the shortest possible distance and route segments that
can be driven quickly
> "Efficient route": an optimized combination of the fastest possible route with a
short route

4. "Stop guidance"

> "Short route": short distance without
taking time into account

Continuing destination
guidance

> "Alternative routes": suggestions of
other alternative routes with destination
guidance running

If the destination was not reached at the end of
the last trip, the system asks whether it should
continue destination guidance.
Select "Resume guidance" or "Stop guidance".

Route criteria
General information
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like while
entering the destination and whenever the destination guidance is active.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The road type is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a
result, the routes recommended by the navigation system may not always be the same ones

5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> Avoid highways where possible:
"Avoid highways"
> Avoid toll roads where possible:
"Avoid toll roads"
> Avoid ferries where possible:
"Avoid ferries"

150
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

The section is displayed in the preview map.

During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"

1. "Navigation"

2. "Route information"

2. Open "Options".

3. "New route for:"

3. "Dynamic guidance"

Navigation

If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take considerably longer.<

Route
General information
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
various views of the route are available during
destination guidance.
> Map display
> Arrow display

4. Turn the controller: enter the desired mileage.
5. Press the controller.
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed: "Remove blocking".

> Display of the streets and towns/cities on
the route

Gas station recommendations

Displaying a list of the streets or towns/
cities on the route

1. "Navigation"

When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is displayed. The driving distances and traffic bulletins are displayed for each route section.
> Display a list of the streets and towns/cities
on the route.

Controls

Bypassing a section of the route

Driving tips

Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated so that you travel
through the traffic obstruction.

3. Highlight a section.

The vehicle calculates the range and recommends several gas stations along the route.
2. "Route information"

Communications Entertainment

"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions. The system does not
point out traffic obstructions along the original
route.

2. "Route information"

3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of filling stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the
guidance.

symbol to start destination

> Display the traffic bulletins and the driving
distance for each route section.

151
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

Dynamic destination guidance

1. "Navigation"

Reference

The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 151 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Destination guidance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 152 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Destination guidance via
voice instructions

Map display

Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.

You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.

1. "Navigation"

2. "Map"

Select the

Symbol

Displaying map view

symbol.
Meaning
Voice instructions switched on
Voice instructions switched off

For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory button, refer to
page 20.

Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"

Symbol

2. "Map"
3.

The following functions are directly available in
the map display:

Highlight the symbol.

4. Press the controller twice.

Adjusting the volume of voice
instructions*
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if necessary.
2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.

Function
Displaying the destination and
starting/terminating destination
guidance
Switching voice instructions on/off
Changing route criteria or selecting route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map display
Changing scale

Information in the map display:
> Time, entertainment source, sound output,
map orientation
> Distance from destination, estimated time
of arrival, if destination guidance is active.
> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in
color.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
152
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

> "View in dir. of travel"

Split screen settings

> "Perspective view"

The map settings for the split screen can be
created separately from the main screen.

3. Press the controller.

Changing map scale
Select interactive map.
> Moving map: move the controller in the corresponding direction.
> Shifting map diagonally: move the controller in the corresponding direction and turn
the controller.

1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
3. Select the settings:
> "Arrow display"
> "View facing north"
> "View in dir. of travel"
> "Perspective view"
> "Exit ramp view"

Changing scale

1. Select the

1. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.

symbol.

2. Turn the controller to change the scale.

2. Turn the controller.

Automatic scaling of the map
In the map display facing north, turn the controller in any direction until AUTO is displayed as
the map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your location to the destination.

Settings for the map display
The map appears on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
3. Set the optimum map view.
> "Day/night mode"
Select according to lighting conditions
and make adjustments. This setting is
disregarded when the traffic info map is
activated.
> "Satellite images"
Satellite images* are displayed,
depending on availability and resolution.
> "Perspective view in 3D"
Shows a three-dimensional depiction.

Traffic information*
You can display the traffic bulletins from radio
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Message Channel) of a traffic information service.
This information from the traffic information
service is continuously updated on the basis of
measurement data from traffic control centers
and information on traffic congestion.
During destination guidance, traffic bulletins
that are relevant to areas along the route are
automatically displayed and taken into account
in the route planning. You can open all traffic
bulletins manually using iDrive.
The traffic bulletins are shown in the map display.

Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
153

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Driving tips

> "Arrow display"

Controls

> "Traffic Info map"

Navigation

> "View facing north"

Communications Entertainment

symbol.

2. Select a setting:

Mobility

1. Select the

Prominent landmarks contained in the
navigation data are displayed on the map
in 3D.

Reference

Viewing the map

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 153 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Destination guidance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 154 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the EndUser is in material breach of the terms and conditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Network") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unauthorized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informational only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is." Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permitted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limitation, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular purpose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental

damages (including, without limitation, lost revenues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. or
BMW NA is aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so those particular limitations may not apply to you.

Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
In many metropolitan areas you can receive
traffic information broadcast by radio stations.
The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic
control centers and the traffic information is
updated periodically.
During destination guidance, the traffic bulletins relevant to your planned route are automatically shown. Whether destination guidance is
active or not, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic
info list.

Traffic bulletins in a list
A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via
the menu or map display.

Opening traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left.
4. Select the

symbol.

5. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
6. Select a traffic bulletin.

154
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Additional information in the map
display

1. Select the

Depending on the map scale, the length, direction, and effects of a traffic obstruction are
depicted by traffic symbols in the map or by
bars along the planned route.

3. To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.

Traffic bulletins in the map
When the traffic info map is activated, the picture on the Control Display is switched to a
grayscale. This permits an optimized depiction
of traffic information. The day/night mode is disregarded in this setting.

Filtering of traffic bulletins
You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be
displayed by the system:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. Open "Options".

1. "Navigation"

4. "Traffic Info categories"

2. "Map"

5. Select the desired category.

3. Open "Options".

Driving tips

symbol.

2. Additional information is displayed.

Controls

Additional information can be displayed for
some traffic bulletins:

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 155 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

4. "Settings"

Symbols in map view
Traffic bulletins of the selected category are
displayed.
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situations, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be
hidden.

Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance

> Larger map scale, e.g. 50 miles/100 km:
white sign with an arrow in the relevant
direction

System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected.
Information on sources of great danger, such as
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of
the setting.

155
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

> Smaller map scale, e.g. 1 mile/2 km: white
sign with the traffic obstruction symbol

Reference

The symbols of traffic obstructions are displayed differently, depending on the scale of
the map and location of the traffic obstruction in
relation to the route.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

5. Activate "Traffic Info map":
The map is optimized to display traffic information. Symbols for the special destinations are no longer displayed.

Destination guidance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 156 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Traffic obstructions
The system calculates the optimized route, taking into consideration traffic obstructions and
road types.

Selecting a detour
You can set whether individual traffic obstructions or all of them are taken into account in the
route planning.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
3. Select the traffic obstruction that is to be
taken into consideration.
4. "Activate detour"

Taking into consideration all traffic
obstructions
1. "Navigation"
2. "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
3. Select "Recomm. detour", if necessary.
"Dynamic guidance" is automatically activated.

156
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 157 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

What to do if …
What to do if …

Controls

> the current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

Driving tips

> the destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.

Navigation

> the destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.

Communications Entertainment

> the letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
Stored data do not contain the data of the
destination. Select a destination that is as
close as possible to the original.
> the map view is displayed in grayscale?
When the traffic info map is activated, the
picture on the Control Display is switched to
a grayscale. This permits an optimized
depiction of traffic information.

157
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new route suggestion.

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 158 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 159 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Entertainment
Operation of the radio and CD as well as their
tone settings are described in this chapter.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

On/off and tone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 160 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:

> Radio

> Select track for CD/DVD player and CD/
DVD changer and certain multimedia
devices

> CD/DVD player
> CD/DVD changer*
> Video
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player

Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station

MODE: change the audio and video
sources

FM/AM: change the radio station waveband

Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using:

Switching on/off

> iDrive

To switch the Entertainment sound output on
and off:
Press button 1 next to the CD/DVD player.

> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11

This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.

> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20

The sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition was switched off.
Switch on the sound output again for this purpose.

> Buttons near the CD/DVD player

> Voice activation system

Buttons near the CD/DVD player

Adjusting volume
Turn button 1 next to the CD/DVD player until
the desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
1

Sound output for entertainment on/off,
volume
> Press: switch on/off
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjust volume

2
3

Ejecting CD/DVD
CD/DVD drive

Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are set for all audio sources at
once.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

160
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Treble, bass, balance, fader

4. Select the desired setting.

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 161 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
Controls

2. "Tone"

6. To store: press the controller.

Multichannel playback, surround*
You can choose between stereo and multichannel playback, surround.
3. Select the desired tone setting.

Driving tips

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".

5. To store: press the controller.
Multichannel playback, surround, is simulated
when playing back an audio track in stereo.

Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"

Surround is automatically activated or deactivated, depending on the audio track selected.

Volume
> "Speed volume": adaptation of the volume
as a function of vehicle speed
> "PDC"*: volume of the PDC signal tone in
comparison to entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for
the safety belt reminder, in comparison to
entertainment sound output

161
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

4. To adjust: turn the controller.

Reference

3. "Surround"

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. "Tone"

On/off and tone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 162 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
4. Select the desired volume setting.

5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.

Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"

162
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Radio
Your radio is designed for reception of the following stations:

3. Select the desired station.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 163 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> FM and AM
> Weather Radio*
> satellite radio*

Selecting a station
Changing stations
Turn the controller and press it
or

Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.

Selecting frequency manually
In "Manual", you can set stations that are being
received in addition to those being displayed.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. In the "AM" band, select from among
"AM"*, "AM", and "AM".
5. Call up the frequency.

Mobility

2. "FM" or "AM"

6. To store the station: press the controller.

163
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

1. "Radio"

press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11.

Navigation

button for the corresponding

Communications Entertainment

press the
direction

Driving tips

Controls

> HD Radio*

Radio

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 164 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Storing stations

4. "RDS"

Using iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

HD Radio*
4. Press the controller again.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The station is stored.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.

Using programmable memory buttons
You can store a station on the programmable
memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Many radio stations transmit analog and digital
signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with improved sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
U.S. and Foreign Patents licensed from iBiquity
Digital Corp. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.

1. Select a station.
2.

...
Press the desired button
for a longer period.

Activating/deactivating digital radio
reception
1. "Radio"

Radio Data System RDS*
In the FM frequency range, additional information is transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions are good, the station names are shown
on the Control Display. If the reception is weak
or disrupted, it can take some time before the
station names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".

2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio"
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
being received digitally.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Any time
shift between these two broadcasts can lead to
repetitions or interruptions in the output. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.

164
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Displaying additional information

Deleting a station

Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.

1. "Radio"

2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.

Stored stations
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.

Selecting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Call up the desired station.

Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"

Weather Radio*
Weather Radio is a service of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA)
of the US Department of Trade. Weather
reports are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and
are routinely updated every 1 to 3 hours, more
frequently as needed. Most stations operate 24
hours a day. In case of a storm, the National
Weather Service interrupts the routine weather
news and transmits special warning messages
instead. If you have a question about NOAA
Weather Radio, please contact the nearest
office of the National Weather Service. Details
are also provided on the Internet at
www.nws.noaa.gov.

Accessing weather news flashes
Operating via iDrive:
1. Switch on radio.

2. "Presets"

2. "Weather band"

3. "Store station"

3. Selecting desired channel.
The station for weather news flashes may be
unavailable in some regions.

Mobility

4. Select the desired memory location.

Controls

1. Select the desired station.

Driving tips

Selecting a substation

5. "Delete entry"

Navigation

3. "Station info"

4. Open "Options".

Communications Entertainment

2. Open "Options".

3. Select the desired station.

The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
You can also store the stations on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page 20.

165
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

1. Select the desired station.

2. "Presets"

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 165 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Satellite radio

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 166 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Satellite radio*
General information
The channels are offered in fixed packages.
Packages must be activated by telephone.

Navigation bar
Symbol

Function
Changing list view
Selecting category
Entering channel directly
Time shift
Accessing favorites, selecting
the My Favorites category
Managing favorites

4. Select the category Unsubscribed Channels.
5. Select desired channel.
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Dial the telephone number to have the
channels activated.

Traffic Jump
The functions of the symbols of the navigation
bar can also be stored on the programmable
memory buttons, refer to page 20.

Managing subscription
Clear reception is required for activating and
deactivating channels. Reception is best when
you have an unobstructed view to the sky. The
channel name is displayed in the status line.

Activating channels
The category Unsubscribed Channels includes
all channels that are not activated.

This telephone number can also be used to
deactivate the channels once more.

Deactivating channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Manage subscription"

1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3.

"Categories"

166
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

"Select channel"

4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is displayed and press the controller.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 167 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. "Satellite radio"
The telephone number and electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.

3. Select "All Channels" or the desired category.

5. Call Sirius to deactivate the channels.

4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.

Selecting channels

6. Press the controller again in order to confirm selection of the highlighted channel.

You can only listen to activated channels.

Driving tips

1. "Radio"

Controls

Storing channel

Using iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"

4. Select desired channel.

7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
You can also store the channels on the programmable memory buttons, refer to page. 20.

Change list view
The list view changes each time the first symbol
on the navigation bar is pressed.

Using the button near the CD/DVD
player
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.

Using direct channel entry

Information about the channel is displayed.
Symbol

Function
Channel name
Artist
Track

Mobility

3. Select "All Channels" or the desired category.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.

2. "Satellite radio"
167
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

1. "Radio"

Satellite radio

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 168 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Select category

Time shift menu

1. "Radio"

Symbol

Function

2. "Satellite radio"

Go to live broadcast

Playback/pause

"Categories"

4. Select the desired category.

Next track
Previous track
Fast forward

Time shift
Approximately one hour of the channel currently being listened to is temporarily stored in a
cache memory. The signal must be available.
The stored audio track can be played back at a
different time from the live broadcast. If the
cache memory is full, then the older tracks are
recorded over. The cache memory is deleted if
a new channel is selected.

Accessing Time shift

Reverse

Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Possible favorites include artist, track,
game, league, and team.

Storing artist, track, or game

1. "Radio"

Only current broadcasts can be stored as favorites. The channel information must be available.

2. "Satellite radio"

1. "Radio"

3. Open "Options".

2. "Satellite radio"

3. Select "All Channels" or the desired category.

"Replay - Time Shift"
A new window appears in the display.

4. Select desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Select artist, track, or game.

Storing league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
> The red arrow indicates the current playback position.

2. "Satellite radio"

> The time difference from the live broadcast
is displayed next to the cache memory bar.

4. "Add sports information"

"Manage favorites"

> During a live broadcast, "live" is displayed
next to the cache memory bar.

168
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Deleting favorites

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 169 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

1. "Satellite radio"
"Manage favorites"

3. Highlight the favorites you wish to delete.
4. Open "Options".
5. Select the desired league.

5. "Delete entry"

Controls

Traffic Jump

Selecting region
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set Jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Activating/deactivating Jump
1. "Radio"
The displayed favorite will be played.

2. "Satellite radio"

If it receives no notification, the system
switches into the My Favorites category. All of
the favorites currently being broadcast can be
selected from a list.

Managing favorites
Activating/deactivating favorites
Favorites can be activated or deactivated globally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2.

"Manage favorites"

3. Select "Activate alert" or desired favorites.

"Jump to:"

As soon as information about the selected
region becomes available, it is broadcast.
A new panel appears in the display.
Cancel Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Symbol

Navigation

1. "Radio"

Communications Entertainment

Select
"Favorites" while the message is
being displayed.

Meaning
Information will be broadcast
soon.
Information is currently being
broadcast.

Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.

169
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

If an activated favorite is being played, then the
message "Playing favorite!" appears for
approx. 20 seconds.

Traffic and weather information for a selected
region are broadcast at intervals of a few minutes.

Reference

Accessing favorites

Driving tips

6. Select "Add all teams" or a desired team.

Satellite radio

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 170 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius carries out an update
of the names and positions of the channels. The
update occurs automatically and can take several minutes.

Notes
> Under some circumstances, reception may
not be possible, e.g. under certain environmental or topographical conditions. The
satellite radio has no influence on this.
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages or near trees, mountains, or other powerful sources of radio
interference.

170
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer*
CD/DVD playback

Starting playback

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 171 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Fill and insert CD/DVD magazine, refer to
page 175.
To start playback if a CD is already located in
the player or changer:

Controls

Using iDrive

2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:

Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
CD changer*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA

Ejecting CD/DVD

DVD changer*

Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
Symbol

Function
CD/DVD player
CD/DVD changer

171
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVDRW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video, CD: CDROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA, VCD, SVCD

Reference

Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled
side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
Playback starts automatically if the sound output is on. CDs/DVDs with compressed audio
files can take a few minutes to read, depending
on their directory structure.

Communications Entertainment

Inserting CD/DVD

Navigation

Driving tips

1. "CD/Multimedia"

CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 172 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Audio playback

5. Select the track and press the controller.

Selecting a track
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.

Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.

Displaying information about the
track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio
files*
It is possible that not all of the characters on the
CD/DVD will be correctly displayed, depending
on the data.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.

> Artist
> Album title
> Track number on the CD/DVD
> Track file name

Random play sequence
The tracks of the current CD/DVD are played
once in a random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".

172
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Starting playback

5. "Random"

For your own safety, the video image is only displayed up to a speed of approx. 2 mph/3 km/h;
in certain country-specific equipment configurations, the video image will only display if the
hand brake is engaged.

Controls

DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4.

"DVD menu"

Driving tips

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the
directories and the tracks contained therein are
played back in random sequence.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.

Fast forward/reverse

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.

VCD/SVCD

Video playback*

1. "CD/Multimedia"

Country codes

3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.

Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.

2. "CD/DVD"
"Select track"

Code

Region

USA, Canada

Japan, Europe, Middle East,
South Africa

Southeast Asia

Australia, Central and South America, New Zealand

5. Select the desired track.

Northwest Asia, North Africa

The CD/DVD starts to play.

China

All regions

173
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

Selected tracks, directories, or CDs/DVDs are
automatically replayed.

Mobility

Automatic replay*

Navigation

button for the corre-

Reference

Press and hold the
sponding direction.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 173 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 174 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Video menu

Language*

To open the Video menu:

1. Turn the controller during playback.

2. Open "Options".

2. Press the controller when "Back" is displayed.

3. "Audio/language"

The Video menu is displayed:
Symbol

Function
Open the DVD menu*
Starting playback
Pause
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous track

4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.

Fast forward
Reverse
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.

Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"

DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
video menu.
2.

Subtitles*

4. Select the desired language or "Do not display subtitles".

"DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.

> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the controller and select "Back".

Settings for DVD/VCD
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
your DVD.

Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"

174
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"

1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 175 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed and then press the controller.

These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.

CD/DVD changer*

Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.

Driving tips

Opening the main menu, back

Controls

5. Select the desired camera angle.

2. Open "Options".

Controls and displays

Selecting title
DVD video:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"

Emptying CD/DVD compartments

LEDs under the CD/DVD slot
flash when CDs/DVDs can be inserted.

Buttons for CD/DVD compartments
The LED lights up when a CD/DVD is in the
compartment.

Camera angle*

CD/DVD slot

The camera angle depends on the DVD.

Loading CD/DVD compartments

5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1.

"Select track"

2. Select the desired track.

175
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

The BMW CD/DVD changer for six CDs/DVDs is
accommodated in the glove compartment.

Reference

4. "Zoom mode"

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

3. "Additional options"

CD/DVD player and CD/DVD changer

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 176 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Loading CD/DVD changer

Removing CDs/DVDs individually

1. Press the
button.
The LED on the first empty compartment
flashes.

1. Press the

2. Select another CD/DVD compartment if so
desired:
Press the
...
button.
3. When the LEDs 2 under the CD/DVD slot
flash, insert a single CD/DVD into the middle.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in and
placed into the selected CD/DVD compartment.
Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs 2
under the CD/DVD slot are flashing;
otherwise, you may damage the CD/DVD or
the CD/DVD changer.
Do not push on the CDs/DVDs; they may
jam and no longer eject properly.<
4. To load additional CD/DVD compartments:
Repeat steps 1 to 3.

Filling empty CD/DVD compartments
1. Hold down the
button.
The LEDs on the empty CD/DVD compartments flash.
2. When the LEDs 2 under the CD/DVD slot
flash, insert a single CD/DVD into the middle.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in and
placed into the first empty CD/DVD compartment.
Only insert CD/DVD if the LEDs 2
under the CD/DVD slot are flashing;
otherwise, you may damage the CD/DVD or
the CD/DVD changer.
Do not push on the CDs/DVDs; they may
jam and no longer eject properly.<

button.

2. Press the
...
button to select the
CD/DVD compartment.
The CD/DVD is slid a short distance out
from the CD/DVD changer.
3. Remove the CD/DVD.
If the CD is not removed, it will be pulled
back in again after approx. 10 seconds.<

Removing all CDs/DVDs
1. Hold down the
button.
The CDs/DVDs will be slid out a short distance out from the CD/DVD changer, in
sequence.
2. Remove the CDs/DVDs.

Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser products. Do not operate if the cover is damaged,
otherwise severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat buildup and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles, as otherwise the CD/DVD or the adapter my jam and no
longer eject properly.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus,
otherwise the CD/DVD may jam and no longer
eject properly.<

General malfunctions

4. To load additional CD/DVD compartments:
Repeat steps 2 and 3.

BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

After filling, it can take a few minutes to read the
CDs/DVDs.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.

3. Wait until the CD/DVD has been pulled in.

176
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 177 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
Controls

If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes:

Self-recorded CDs/DVDs

Driving tips

Possible reasons for malfunctions with selfrecorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent
data-creation or recording processes, or poor
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.

Navigation

Damage

Communications Entertainment

Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and moisture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels
or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy protection feature by the manufacturer. This can
mean that some CDs/DVDs cannot be played or
can only be played to a limited extent.

MACROVISION

177
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered U.S. patents and the intellectual property of the Macrovision Corporation and other manufacturers.
Use of this copyrighted material must be
approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise
agreed with Macrovision, media with this protection may only be used for private purposes.
The copying of this technology is strictly forbidden.

Music collection

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 178 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Music collection
Music, storing
The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB
devices can be stored in the music collection in
the vehicle and played from there.

Storing CDs/DVDs
CDs/DVDs can only be stored by the CD/DVD
player.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.

> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a compressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.

2. "CD/Multimedia"

> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehicle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC
formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.

5. "Store in vehicle"

Regularly back up the music data; otherwise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard disk.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry standard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
5,987,525, 6,061,680, 6,154,773, 6,161,132,
6,230,192, 6,230,207, 6,240,459, and
6,330,593 as well as other granted or pending
patents. Some services supplied under license
from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
6,304,523.

3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the
player.

symbol for the CD/DVD

The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence from the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage process:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player, otherwise the storage process will be
interrupted.
You can switch to the other audio sources without interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD can also be called up,
if they have been stored already.

Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo
are trademarks of Gracenote.

178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

3. "Storing..."

1. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 179 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
Controls

6. "Import music (USB)"

4. "Cancel storing"
Driving tips

The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.

Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"

4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of
the track at which storage was interrupted.

Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this information is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.

Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"

Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be connected to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.

Mobility

> Unsuitable devices: USB hard disks, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multiple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.

Communications Entertainment

symbol for the CD/DVD

Music from a USB device can be stored
only via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<

179
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

3. Select the
player.

Navigation

2. "CD/DVD"

Music collection

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 180 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

4. Select the desired category.

Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.

Albums
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, select that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.

All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
Symbol

Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files

1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.

7. "Start play"

Restarting the music search
"New search"

Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "Current playback"

Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.

Random play sequence
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.

2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".

180
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

4. "Random"

4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"

Deleting a directory or track

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 181 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
the directory is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".

Albums

5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".

Renaming an album

Free memory capacity

The name of the album, if available, is automatically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later.

Display the free memory capacity in the music
collection.

An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.

2. "Music collection"

1. "CD/Multimedia"

4. "Free memory"

Navigation

1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Open "Options".

2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"

Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup during a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB device to the USB interface in the glove compartment.
3. "CD/Multimedia"

Deleting an album

4. "Music collection"

An album cannot be deleted while a track from
the album is being played.

5. Open "Options".

Mobility

6. Select the letters individually.

Driving tips

3. Highlight the directory or track.

Communications Entertainment

Managing music

Controls

A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.

1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the album.
181
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

2. "Music collection"

Music collection

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 182 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

6. "Music data import/export"

7. "Backup music on USB"

Restoring the music collection in the
vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the
music collection existing in the vehicle is
replaced.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"

Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"

182
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 183 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

External devices
4. "Volume"

Open the lid of the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks through the vehicle's
speaker system, connect the headphone or
line-out port of the device with the AUX-IN connection.

Starting audio playback
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track. Operate the system on the audio
device.

Using iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2.

"AUX front"

Adjusting volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. Then say "External devices" if applicable.
3.

"AUX front"

USB-audio interface*/
extended connectivity of
music player in mobile
phone*
It is possible to connect external audio devices/
mobile phones. They can be operated using
iDrive. Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.

Options for connecting external
devices
> Connection via USB audio interface:
Apple iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g.
MP3 players, USB memory sticks, or
mobile phones that are supported by the
USB audio interface.
> Connection via snap-in adapter*, refer to
page 212, when equipped with expanded
connection of the music player in the mobile
phone: Apple iPhone/mobile phones. Playback is possible only if no audio device/
mobile phone is connected to the USBaudio interface.
Due to the vast array of audio devices/mobile
phones on the market, it is not possible to
assure that every audio device/mobile phone
can be operated via the vehicle.
Ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center,
183

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Navigation

6. To store: press the controller.

Communications Entertainment

5. To adjust: turn the controller.

Mobility

Connecting

Driving tips

Controls

You can connect an external audio device, e.g.
an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehicle speakers. The sound can be adjusted via
iDrive.

Reference

AUX-IN connection

External devices

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 184 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

which audio devices/mobile phones are compatible.

take some time. The time required is dependent
on the USB device and on the number of tracks.

Audio files

During transmission, the tracks can be
accessed via the file directory.

Standard audio formats, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV
(PCM) and AAC, and playlists in the M3U format
can be played.

Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the vehicle, or a total of about
16,000 tracks.

Connecting via USB-audio interface
Open the lid of the center armrest.

If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are stored, information on existing tracks may be deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<

Starting audio playback
If the audio device has a device name, this will
be displayed if possible.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
1

AUX-IN connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm

USB interface

2. "External devices"
3. Select the
symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.

Apple iPod/iPhone
Use the special cable adapter for Apple iPods/
iPhones, which you can obtain from your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center. The cable
adapter is required for a proper connection.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the AUX-IN
connection and USB interface 1 using the cable
adapter for Apple iPod/iPhone.
The menu structure of the Apple iPod/iPhone is
supported by the USB audio interface.

USB device
When connecting the device use a flexible adapter cable, to protect the USB
interface and your USB device against physical
damage.<
Connect the USB device to connector 2, using
a flexible adapter cable.
When the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This process can

The playback starts with the first track. If an
Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in
adapter while an audio device is connected to
the AUX-IN connection at the same time, the
audio signal of the AUX-IN connection will be
played.

Information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks
> Track file name

184
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

"New search"

Selection is possible via:

To open playback lists.

> Playback lists

1. "CD/Multimedia"

> Information: type of music, artist, album,
title

2. "External devices"

> Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer

4. "Playlists"

Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.

Current playback

3. Select the
symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Artist".

List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the

symbol.

4. "Current playback"

Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"

Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the
sponding direction.
All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z
search" can be used to find specific entries.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed. Not all categories need to be selected. For example, to
search for all tracks by a certain artist, select
that artist only. All of the tracks by that artist
are then displayed.

button for the corre-

Notes
Do not subject the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
extremely high temperatures, refer to the operating manual of the audio device. Otherwise the
audio device may be damaged, impairing driving safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s,
proper playback cannot always be ensured.

Navigation

2. "External devices"

symbol.

Communications Entertainment

1. "CD/Multimedia"

3. Select the

Mobility

Starting the track search

Playback lists

Controls

Restarting a track search

You can access the tracks via the playback lists
and information. With USB devices you can also
access the tracks via the file directory.

Driving tips

Track search

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 185 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

185
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

6. "Start play"

External devices

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 186 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Information on connection
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a current of max. 500 mA, if the device
supports this. Therefore, do not connect
the device to the power socket in the vehicle.
> Do not use force when plugging the connector into the USB interface.
> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or
lamps, to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
recharge external devices.

186
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 187 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

DVD system in rear*
Controls

Controls

With the DVD system in the rear you can play
CDs and DVDs with audio, video and image
data. The DVD system can also play data from
attached external audio and video devices.
Audio output is possible both via headphones
and via the vehicle speakers.
You can control the DVD system using the buttons on the CD-/DVD player or using the remote
control.

Driving tips

You operate some functions using the
remote control.<

Enabling DVD system
The DVD system can be enabled via iDrive.

DVD-System is enabled.

Display screen

Infrared interface for headphones

CD/DVD player

Headphone connection:
Jack 1/8 in/3.5 mm

12 V sockets, refer to page 121

Folding in display screen
When using the ski bag or when transporting
bulky pieces of luggage, the display screen
should be folded in, as otherwise it may be damaged.
When the screen is folded down, do not
open the lid of the center arm rest or rest
your arm on the screen; otherwise, you may
damage the screen.<

187
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

3. "Rear DVD system active"

Reference

2. "Allow rear control"

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

1. "Settings"

DVD system in rear

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 188 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Connecting headphones
You can connect headphones with a phone jack
1/8 in/3.5 mm or operate them using the infrared interface.
To enable optimal use of the infrared interface,
use infrared headphones that comply with the
IEC 61603-2 standard.

1. Turn display screen, arrow 1.
The display screen switches off.
2. Fold in display screen, arrow 2.
The display screen is folded out in the reverse
order.

CD/DVD player
Controls

> Compatible infrared headphones and information about supported headphones are
available at your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
When using infrared headphones, it is
important not to interrupt the infrared
connection between the headphones and the
infrared interface, refer to page 187. This
means that no obstacle should come between
the two and that the cover of the infrared interface should not be covered or scratched. Unfavorable lighting conditions such as glare from
outside can interfere with reception.<

Remote control

Press: switching the DVD system on and off
Rotate: left headset volume and vehicle volume

Ejecting CD/DVD

Start track
Stop
Playback, pause, freeze-frame
Next track

CD/DVD slot

Connection for external device: RCA jacks

Press: switching the DVD system on and off
Rotate: right headset volume and vehicle
volume

Menu navigation

Volume for headphones with jack plug

Changing track or chapter during CD-,
DVD- or AUX playback, fast forward/rewind

Headphones right/left

Open start menu for DVD system

Menu navigation
You can use the thumbwheel and buttons 1 to
navigate through the menus.
> Turn the thumbwheel:
To select a menu item.

188
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

> Press the
button:
To activate the menu item.
The transmission time of the remote control is
limited in accordance with legal guidelines. A
function can be repeated by pressing or turning
the appropriate button or knob.

Sound output via speakers
In addition to the headphones, you can also play
the sound via the vehicle speakers.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. "AUX/rear"

Controls

> Press the arrow buttons:
To switch between windows.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 189 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Driving tips

Changing batteries

Press the button on the CD-/DVD player or
under the desired screen.
The DVD system switches on automatically
when a CD or DVD is inserted.

3. Close the cover.
Return old batteries to a collection point
or to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.<

Setting the language of the
DVD system
1. Select a CD/DVD track.
2. Press the

Playing CD/DVD
Use the following menu items to access data
from a CD/DVD:
> Video data via "DVD"
> Audio data via "CD"
> Pictures via "Photo".

button.

3. Select "Tone".
4. Press the

button.

Communications Entertainment

1. Press the detent and remove the cover.
2. Change the batteries. The type and installation position are marked on the bottom of
the battery compartment.

Navigation

Switching DVD system on/off

5. Switch to the top window.
6. Select "Language".
Mobility

button.

8. Select the desired language.
9. Press the

button.

189
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

7. Press the

DVD system in rear

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 190 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Playing videos from CDs/
DVDs
Country codes of DVDs
Your DVD player only plays DVDs with the coding of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2. The
country codes supported by your DVD are contained in the information on your DVD.
An overview of the coding zones:
Code Region
1

USA, Canada

Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa

Southeast Asia

Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand

Northwest Asia, North Africa

China

Ejecting CD/DVD
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

DVD control
With the DVD control, you can select the title
and chapter, open the DVD-specific menu and
operate functions such as Language, Fast forward and Reverse or Freeze frame.
A DVD can briefly deactivate functions of the
DVD control, under certain circumstances while
the entire DVD is being played. It is not possible
to operate the DVD control under these circumstances. In this case, try to make the selection
using the DVD-specific menu.
1. Press the
button on the remote control during playback.

DVDs with the code 0 can be played on all
devices.<

Starting playback
1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
> Playback begins automatically after a
few seconds.
> If it does not:
Select "DVD".
Press the
button.
2. If the DVD control or the DVD-specific
menu is displayed when a DVD is inserted,
use the remote control buttons for menu
navigation to select the desired option.

2. Press the
buttons on the remote control
or turn the thumbwheel to select the
desired function.
3. Press the
Symbol
"SET"

Settings for playing DVD
Starting playback
Stop playback
Activate and deactivate
freeze frame

button on the CD/DVD player.

Skipping chapter

You can control the playback with the buttons
on the CD/DVD player or the DVD control.
Video-CDs, VCDs, and Super-VideoCDs, i.e. SVCDs, can only be played if
they do not have a DVD-specific menu.<

Function
Exit DVD control

Or:
Press the

button.

Fast forward/reverse
"Menu"

Open DVD-specific menu

The DVD control disappears again after a short
time if you have not selected a function.

190
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Or:

Press the
button on the remote control to
exit the DVD control.

Press the
button on the left or right on the
remote control repeatedly until you reach the
desired chapter.

Forward/reverse with DVD control
1. Press the
button on the remote control during playback.
2. Select the

1. Press the
button on the remote control during playback.

symbol.
button.

Driving tips

4. Press the
button several times to
increase the fast forward/reverse speed.
The DVD playback will be distorted.
To cancel fast forward/reverse:
2. Press the

symbol.
button.

2. Select the

Or:
Press the

3. Press the
button on the CD/DVD player.

The DVD will start play at the point selected.

Forward/reverse with remote control
Press and hold the
the desired point.

button until you reach

Or:
1. During playback, turn the thumbwheel.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted.

symbol.
button.

To continue playback:
1. Select the
2. Press the

symbol.

button.

As an alternative, you can also stop and continue playback with the
button on the CD/
DVD player.

Making settings for DVD
1. Press the

button during playback.

2. Continue to turn the thumbwheel.
The speed is increased.
3. Press the
button on the CD/DVD player.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The
DVD will start play at the point selected.

Skipping chapter

Navigation

1. Select the

Communications Entertainment

3. Press the

Freeze frame
Controls

Fast forward/reverse

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 191 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Select the

symbol.

3. Press the
button repeatedly, continuing
until you reach the desired chapter.

2. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Video settings":
> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of
the screen
> After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Language":
191

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

1. Press the
button on the remote control during playback.

Mobility

You can change to the next or previous chapter
during playback.

DVD system in rear

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 192 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

The system language of the DVD system
"Display": background brightness of
screen.
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.
> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
> "DVD format":
> "Standard"
> "Zoom": full-screen playback
> "Language":
Language of the DVD playback. The language advances one setting each time the
menu item is selected.
> "Subtitles":
Language of subtitles
or turn off subtitles

Opening the DVD-specific menu
Additional functions may be available on DVDs.
It is thus possible, for example, to select from
among several possible actions or to access
information about the film.
1. Press the
button on the remote control during playback.
2. Select "Menu".
3. Press the

button.

On some DVDs, you can use "Main
menu" and "Title" to access additional menus in which you can select magazine segments about the music scene, for
example.<
To make a selection:
1. Select the

symbol.

2. Press the
button until the desired function is selected.
3. Select the

arrow.

4. Press the

button.

To return to the start menu:

> "Title":
Selecting individual tracks on the DVD

1. Select the

arrow.

2. Press the

button.

> "Angle of view":
Camera angle
Notes or symbols that appear during the
playback of a film generally point out different camera angles. These are usually only
briefly available.

You can also select language, subtitles,
camera angle, or title in the DVD-specific
menu.
Consult the information accompanying your
DVD.<

> "Menu":
Call up the DVD-specific menu.

Compressed video files

> "Return":
Exit menu or:
Press the
buttons on the remote control.

Playback
1. Select the directory if necessary.

Many DVDs offer dialogs and subtitles in various languages or scene descriptions for the
hearing impaired. These functions are stored
on the DVD.
With some DVDs, it is only possible to
select language, subtitles, camera angle,
or title by using the DVD-specific menu.
Consult the information accompanying your
DVD.<

2. Press the

button.

192
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the labeled
side facing upward. The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.
> Playback begins automatically after a few
seconds.
4. Press the

button.

5. Select "Play".
6. Press the

button.

To change the directory:
1. Select the directory.

> If it does not:
Select "CD".
Press the
button.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files, refer to
page 194, can take approx. 1 minute to read,
depending on their directory structure.
To play back audio tracks from a DVD, refer to
Compressed audio files page 194.

Controls

Starting playback

Driving tips

Playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD

3. Select a track.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 193 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Select "CD".
3. Press the

button.

Playback functions
1. Select a track.
button.

3. Select a menu item:
> "Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
> "Repeat track":
Repeat selected track.
> "Repeat directory":
Repeat the tracks in the current directory.
4. Press the

button.

As an alternative, you can also control the playback with the buttons on the CD/DVD player.
To eject CD/DVD:
Press the

button on the CD/DVD player.

Selecting a track
Buttons on CD/DVD player
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly until you reach the desired
track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.

193
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

2. Press the

Reference

2. Press the

button.

Communications Entertainment

1. Open the start menu with the remote control.

Navigation

To start playback if a CD is already in the drive:

DVD system in rear

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 194 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Using the remote control
Press the
button for the corresponding
direction repeatedly or turn the thumbwheel
until you reach the desired track.
Playback begins at the start of the track.

> "Repeat":
Repeat the current track. Select again to
end.
To exit from the menu:
Press the
buttons on the remote control.

Fast forward/reverse
Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the
sponding direction.

button for the corre-

Compressed audio files
Playback
Settings and playback functions for
audio CDs

1. Select the directory if necessary.

1. Select "SET".
2. Press the

button.

2. Press the

button.

3. Select a track.
3. Make the settings with the remote control:
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": separately adjustable for the left and right
headphones and infrared headphones.
> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
> "Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
> "Random":
The tracks of the CD are played back once
in random sequence.

4. Press the

button.

5. Select "Play".
6. Press the

button.

> "Scan":
Brief samples of all tracks on the CD are
automatically played one after another.

194
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

To exit from the menu:
Press the
buttons on the remote control.

Displaying images from
CD/DVD
button.

Settings and playback functions for
compressed audio files
1. Select a track.

3. Select "Photo".
4. Press the

button.

3. Make the settings with the remote control:

Displaying overview

> "Tone":

1. Select the subdirectory if necessary.

> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.

2. Select "Overview".

> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.
> "Pause":
Stop and continue playback.
> "Scan directory":
Briefly sample the tracks in the current
directory.
> "Scan all":
Briefly sample all tracks.
> "Random directory":
Play the tracks in the current directory in a
random sequence.

3. Press the

button.

It may take some time until the overview is completely displayed.
If a symbol appears instead of an image,
the image cannot be displayed in the
overview.<

Mobility

> "Random all":
Play all tracks in a random sequence.

Navigation

button.

Communications Entertainment

2. Press the

2. Open the start menu with the remote control.

> "Repeat track":
Repeat the selected track.
> "Repeat directory":
Repeat the tracks in the current directory.

195
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

2. Press the

1. Push the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing upward.
The CD/DVD is automatically pulled in.

Controls

1. Select the directory.

> "Details":
Display any stored information on the current track.

Driving tips

To change the directory:

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 195 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

DVD system in rear

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 196 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Displaying images

Symbol

Function

1. Use the buttons or the thumbwheel of the
remote control to select an image.

Display first/last picture of the
current directory

2. Press the

Rotate image by 90°

button.
"Overview"

Change to image overview

3. Press the

button.

Ending display
1. Press the
2. Select the
3. Press the
3. Displaying images:
> Scroll using the menu navigation buttons of the remote control
> Show slide show:
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust how long
each image is displayed.
Stop slide show:
Select "Stop

Adjusting
1. Press the

button.

button.
symbol.
button.

Ejecting CD/DVD
Press the

button on the CD/DVD player.

Information on CD/DVD
player
Safety notes
The BMW CD/DVD player is a Class 1
laser product. Do not operate if the cover
is damaged; otherwise, severe eye damage can
result.<

Suitable media

2. Select a menu item:
Symbol

Function
Return to the photo menu

"SET"

Adjust the screen "Display".
"Language": after switching to
the top window, you can
change the system language.
Start slide show

Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with
labels applied as these can become
detached during playback due to heat buildup
and can cause irreparable damage to the
device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm.
Do not play CDs/DVDs using an adapter, e.g.
CD singles; otherwise, the CD may jam and no
longer eject properly.
Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVDPlus or
hybrid discs; otherwise, the CD/DVD may jam
and no longer eject properly.<
The CD/DVD player can play the following
media:
> Video DVD
> CD-DA (Audio CD)

196
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

> CDs/DVDs with compressed image data

Digital Rights Management (DRM)

> CDs/DVDs with compressed audio data

In some cases, it may not be possible to play
CDs/DVDs with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM).

Supported formats
Depending on the compression method used,
not all files of the specified formats can be
opened.

Images

Make sure that no foreign objects or liquids get into the CD/DVD slot; otherwise,
the CD/DVD player will be damaged.<

Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensation on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this can be due to one of the following
causes.

JPEG/JPG
With very large image files, it can take longer for
the images to be displayed.

Compressed audio files
> MP3
> WMA
> AAC

Compressed video files

> MPEG2
> MPEG4/DivX

Damaged CDs/DVDs
Avoid fingerprints, dust, scratches and moisture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a sleeve.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506 or to high humidity levels or
direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often provided with a copy protection feature by the manufacturer. As a result,
197
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

> MPEG1

Possible reasons for malfunctions with copied
or self-recorded CDs/DVDs may include inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or significant aging of the CD/DVD
blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the upper side with a
pen intended for this purpose.

> OGG

> SVCD

Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs

Controls

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check
whether it has been inserted correctly.

Driving tips

The BMW CD/DVD player is optimized for operation in the vehicle. It may react more sensitively to defective CDs/DVDs than devices
intended for stationary use.

Navigation

Dual-sided DVDs available from retail suppliers
are coated on both sides and bear no markings.
This means both sides are information carriers.
To play the information on the other side, turn
over the DVD.

General malfunctions

Communications Entertainment

The DVD player does not support DVD audio.
However, many audio DVDs available in stores
also contain a video track in the DVD Video format in addition to the audio track. These DVDs
can be played back by the DVD player. Refer to
the information on your DVD to determine
whether your audio DVD contains an additional
video track. Depending on the authoring used, it
is possible that not all functions are available
during playback.

Mobility

> CDs/DVDs with compressed video data

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 197 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

DVD system in rear

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 198 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

some CDs/DVDs cannot be played, can only be
played to a limited degree, or cause the system
to switch off. In this case, wait a short while and
then switch the system back on again. Then
remove the CD/DVD from the drive.

4. Press the

button.

CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files
If the language set for the CD/DVD player does
not match the language of the music track, the
music tracks may be displayed incorrectly.

Care instructions
More information about this can be found under
Care, starting on page 246.

For devices without a video signal, e.g. MP3
players, "No video signal" appears in the display. The sound is nevertheless played.

Settings for external devices

External device

1. Press the

button during playback.

Connecting

2. Make the settings with the remote control:
1

Connections for audio/video cables:
Watch the colors of the sockets when connecting.
Yellow socket: video
White socket: audio left
Red socket: audio right
Power supply for external device: socket
with removable cap, also refer to page 121.

Playback
1. Switch on the external device and start the
playback.
2. Open the start menu with the remote control.

> "Video settings":
> "Brightness", "Color" and "Contrast" of
video playback
> "NTSC color":
The color can be adjusted on an external
device with the NTSC standard.
> "Standard":
The DVD system can be adapted to
external devices with different TV standards; to do so, consult the instruction
manual of the external device.
> "Reset":
The settings are reset to the default
value.

3. Select "AUX".

198
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 199 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
Separately adjustable for the left and
right-hand headphones and the infrared
headphones.

Controls

> "Reset":
Your settings are reset.

Driving tips

> After switching to the top window, you
can change other settings.
"Audio": adjust the volume of the external device to the volume of the CD/DVD
player.
"Language":
the system language of the DVD system
"Display":
background brightness of screen.
> "Video Format":
> "Standard"

Navigation

> "Zoom": full-screen playback

199
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

To exit from the menu:
Press the
buttons on the remote control.

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 200 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 201 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Communications
This chapter summarizes how to operate your
mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and
how to use BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices.

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Telephone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 202 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Telephone*
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone using iDrive, the buttons on the steering wheel, or voice commands*.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. The pairing
data of up to four mobile phones can be stored
simultaneously. If several mobile phones are
detected simultaneously, the respective last
mobile phone paired can be operated via the
vehicle.

Using a phone in your vehicle
Using snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone
cradle, enables the battery to be charged and
the mobile phone to be connected to the external antenna of your vehicle. This ensures
improved network reception and a consistent
voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center which mobile
phones snap-in adapters are offered for.

For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emergency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situation allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-

tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<

Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center which mobile phones with Bluetooth
interface are supported by the mobile phone
preparation package and which mobile phones
are compatible with the snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular software versions, these
mobile phones support the functions described
in this Owner's Manual. Malfunctions can occur
with other mobile phones.

Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 11
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands*, refer to page 209
> Programmable memory buttons, refer to
page 20
Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by
the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile
phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.

Commissioning
Pairing mobile phone in vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the full mobile phone
preparation package. Information on this
subject is also provided on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com/bluetooth
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
> Bluetooth has been activated in the vehicle,
refer to page 204, and on the mobile phone.

202
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

6. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.

> Reconnect
> Depending on the mobile phone model, the
setting energy saving mode can, for example, result in vehicle failing to detect the
paired mobile phone.
> For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16digit number as a Bluetooth passkey,
e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number
offers the best protection against unauthorized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no
longer required following successful pairing.

7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.

Pairing

> The ignition is switched on.

Depending on your mobile phone, you will first
be requested consecutively via the display of
your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Bluetooth passkey you specified.

Only pair the mobile phone with the vehicle stationary, otherwise the passengers
and other road users can be endangered due to
a lack of attentiveness on the part of the
driver.<

8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, approx.
30 seconds are available for entering the
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and on the Control Display.

Switching on ignition
1. Insert the remote control as far as possible
into the ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.

Preparation via iDrive
3. "Telephone"

If pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.

4. "Bluetooth"
5. "Add new phone"

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the
vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the
SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmitted to your vehicle. This transmission is dependent on your mobile phone, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone if
necessary, and can take several minutes.

Controls

> Connection must be allowed without
requiring further confirmation

Driving tips

Preparation with mobile phone

Navigation

> Bluetooth activated

Communications Entertainment

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is displayed.

Mobility

> Depending on the mobile phone, certain
settings may be necessary on the mobile
phone, e.g. via the following menu items:

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 203 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.
203
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Reference

If not all phone book entries are displayed:

Telephone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 204 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

> It may not be possible to display phone
book entries with special characters.

Checking if pairing is unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? Information on this subject is also provided on
the Internet at: www.bmw.com/bluetooth

4. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
5. Open "Options".
6. "Remove phone from list"

> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and the vehicle match? The same
Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on
the mobile phone display and via iDrive.
> Have you required longer than 30 seconds
to enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then
repeat the pairing procedure.
> Only a limited number of devices can be
connected to the mobile phone. Delete the
connection to other devices if necessary.
> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch
the mobile phone off and then on again or
disconnect the power supply.

Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth"
3. Select the desired mobile phone.

The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are also deleted.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link
Bluetooth technology is not approved in
all countries. Observe the applicable local
regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle and the mobile
phone if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot
operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and
other devices with a Bluetooth interface can be
used via the mobile phone, e.g. a laptop computer.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"

Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle
1. Switch off the mobile phone.
2. "Telephone"
3. "Bluetooth"

204
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Adjusting volume

> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or pointing the
open front air vents downward.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 205 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions via
iDrive:

If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone number has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.

Accepting a call

> Accepting/refusing a call

Press the

> dialing phone numbers

> Dialing phone numbers from the phone
book

"Accept"

button on the steering wheel

> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of received calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition is switched off or in radio
readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition switch, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for several minutes.

Speech quality

Rejecting a call

If the person you are talking to is having difficulties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The full preparation package mobile phone can compensate for
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize the
speech quality during a call, we recommend
that you:

"Reject"
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has
been activated.

Ending a call
Press the

Driving tips

Receiving calls

Communications Entertainment

The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

> The mobile phone is detected by the vehicle.

button on the steering wheel

205
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Mobility

This volume for the hands-free system is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to
minimum volume.

> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.

Reference

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired
volume.

> The pairing data of the mobile phone are
stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone
is ready to operate.

Navigation

Requirements

Controls

> Reduce the volume of the hands-free system.

Telephone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 206 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Accepting a call while speaking to
another party

1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. Select an active call.

This function may need to be enabled by the
service provider, and the mobile phone may
have to be set up accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is put
on hold.

Establishing a second call
Dialing phone numbers
1. "Telephone"

1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"

2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4.

Establish another call during an active call.

3. "Hold"

Select this symbol to establish the connection

The existing call is put on hold.
or
press the

4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
button on the steering wheel.

For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are calling, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your service provider.

Switching between two calls, toggling
> Active call: indicated by a red handset
> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset
To switch to the call on hold, select this handset.

Calls with multiple parties
You can switch between calls and combine two
calls to a single conference call. These functions must be supported by the mobile phone
and the service provider.

Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single telephone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"

206
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
A connection is established immediately if
calling contacts with one phone number.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 207 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Phone book
The phone book accesses the contacts* and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"

The entries in the contacts can be changed.
When a contact from the mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored on the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".

Driving tips

Editing a contact
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended.

Controls

For contacts with several phone numbers:
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.

3. "Edit entry"

Dialing the number using iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"

Symbol

Storage location

No symbol

In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone

3. Select the desired entry.
The connection is established.

Deleting entries
1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

207
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Communications Entertainment

The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored.

Mobility

Redialing

Reference

All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.

Navigation

The contact can be edited.

2. "Phone book"

Telephone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 208 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Saving an entry in the contacts

Messages

1. Highlight the entry.

Various types of messages can be displayed:

2. Open "Options".

> SMS
Whether or not SMS are displayed depends
on whether transmission to the vehicle is
supported by the mobile phone. SMS may
not be supported by the service provider, or
the function may need to be enabled separately.

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business" or "Mobile".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store in vehicle"

Received calls
The 20 calls that were last received are displayed.

> My Info messages from the BMW Assist
portal.
> Messages from BMW Concierge service

Displaying messages

1. "Telephone"

2. "Store contact"

2. "Messages"
A symbol identifies the type of message.
3.

Select the desired message.

SMS
To call the sender of an SMS:
1.

Select the desired message.

2. Open "Options".
3. "Call sender"

Dialing a number

To store the sender in the contacts:

Select an entry.
The connection is established.

Deleting entries

Select the desired message.

2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".

1. Highlight the entry.
2. Open "Options".

My Info

3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".

Replying:
Sending a predefined reply.

Saving an entry in the contacts

1. Highlight the entry.

2. Open "Options".

3. "Answer"

3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".

To start destination guidance:

4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Business" or "Mobile".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact"

Select the desired message.

1. Select the message that contains the
desired destination.
2.

"Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".

To dial the number in the message:

1. Select the message.
2.

"Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".

Depending on the mobile phone model used,
the conversation can be continued via the
hands-free system if necessary. Refer to the
display on your mobile phone and/or your
mobile phone's operating instructions.

From handsfree system to mobile
phone
When you telephone via the handsfree system,
you can also continue the call via the mobile
phone if necessary, depending on the mobile
phone model. Act according to what is shown
on the mobile phone display, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
To dial a phone number:
1. Select the message.
2.

"Call"

Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link, refer to page 204.
Depending on your mobile phone model, poor
reception of the wireless communications network can result in the system changing from the
hands-free system to the mobile phone.

To save an address:
1. Select the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"

Deleting messages
1. Select the message to be deleted.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete message"

Changing between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue calls begun outside the Bluetooth range of the vehicle via the handsfree system when the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on. Depending on your mobile phone,

Operation by voice*
The concept
You can operate your mobile phone without
having to remove your hands from the steering
wheel. When making your entries, you will be
supported by announcements or questions in
many cases.
The same prerequisites as for operation via
iDrive apply, refer to page 205.

Voice commands
Activating system
1. Briefly press the
button on the steering
wheel.
An acoustic signal indicates that you can
say commands.
2. Say the command.

Mobility

To use the address in destination guidance*:

Reference

Messages from the concierge service

Controls

For mobile phones that do not automatically
switch over to the handsfree mode:

"Call"

Driving tips

Navigation

the system automatically switches over to the
handsfree mode.

Communications Entertainment

1. Select the message that contains the
desired number.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 209 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Telephone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 210 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Press the
or

You can have the possible commands spoken
by the system at any point:

button on the steering wheel

{Voice commands}.

Using alternative commands

{Cancel}.
In dialogs where text is spoken, e.g. a name
rather than a command, canceling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud
The system understands default commands
that must be spoken word for word.

There are often a number of commands to run a
function, e.g.:
{Dial number} or {Choose name}.
The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

Example: dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
press the

button on the steering wheel.

You say

The voice control answers

{Dial number}

e.g. {123 456 7890}

Depending on equipment:
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}

{Dialing}

Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:

Calling
Dialing phone numbers
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dialing}.
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.

Correcting phone number
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
The command {Correct number} can be
repeated as often as you like.

Creating and editing a voice phone
book
Store entry:
An entry always consists of a name and phone
number.

You can have all the entries of your voice phone
book read aloud in the order of input and select
a certain entry to establish a connection:
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading phone book is
opened.
2. {Dial number}, when the desired entry
is read aloud.

Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
1. {Choose name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.

1. {Save name}.

2. Say the name when prompted.

2. Speak the name.
The spoken length of the names in the
phone book must not exceed approx.
2 seconds.

3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. To store the phone number:
{Save}.
Delete entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
Delete all entries:
{Delete phonebook} deletes all entries in the
phone book.

Controls

The entries must be entered using voice commands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. In this case, it is not possible to
use voice command either to call phone numbers stored in the mobile phone or to store new
numbers. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An
entry always consists of a name and phone
number.

Have entries read aloud and select:

Driving tips

Operating by voice command requires a personal voice phone book.

3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.

Redialing
To redial the phone number dialed last:
{Redial}

Notes
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, keep the following in
mind:
> Issue the commands smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphases
and pauses.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof
closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.
> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.

Navigation

Voice phone book

2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.

Communications Entertainment

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Mobility

{Delete}.

1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting phone book is
opened.

Reference

Deleting phone number

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 211 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Telephone

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 212 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Inserting/removing the snapin adapter*
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.

Inserting mobile phone
1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's antenna connector if necessary, so
that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. Push the mobile phone with the buttons
facing upward toward the electrical connections and press down until it engages.

2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.

The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steering is unlocked.
To conserve vehicle battery power, you
should avoid using the mobile phone
when the ignition is switched off.<
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.

Removing mobile phone

Press the button.

Contacts*
You can create and edit contacts. The contacts
of the mobile phone* are also displayed. The
addresses can be used as destinations for navigation and the phone numbers can be dialed.

Specifying a contact as home address

New contact

2. "New contact"

1. "Contacts"

3. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.

A contact can be stored as a home address. It is
placed at the top of "My contacts".
1. "Contacts"

Controls

2. "New contact"

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 213 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

When the home address is deleted, only the
content of the home address entry is deleted
and not the entry itself.

My contacts

5. Enter the text.

6. "Store contact in vehicle"

A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the
mobile phone*.

Displaying contacts
"My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z

Mobility

If the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, it is only possible to
enter addresses that are contained in the
navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures
that destination guidance is possible for all
addresses.<

Reference

4. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.

Navigation

3. If the entry fields are still filled with previous
entries, select "Delete input fields".

Communications Entertainment

5. "Store as home address"

Driving tips

4. Open "Options".

Contacts

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 214 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

search is offered. A symbol indicates the storage location of the contacts:
Symbol

Storage location

No symbol

In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a destination.
Mobile phone*

Displaying the detailed view*
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.

3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
After an address has been corrected, the contact can be stored in the vehicle. The address is
not changed on the mobile phone.

Dialing phone numbers
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.

Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"

Selecting a contact as navigation
destination

4. Change the entries.

1. "My contacts"

5. "Store contact in "My contacts"""

2. Select the desired contact.

If a contact from the mobile phone is edited, the
changes are not stored on the mobile phone. A
copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle, and
only this copy is displayed.

3. Select the desired address.
Contacts from the mobile phone may contain
addresses that do not match the navigation
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot
be used for destination guidance. In this case:
Manually correct the address.

Checking a destination address
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data contained in the vehicle. An address that is stored
on the mobile phone can be corrected to match
the navigation data.

Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".

Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in on a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmitting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine the current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a
GPS signal must be available.
> The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or with the BMW Assist
Response Center. Enabling must have
been completed.
> BMW Assist is activated.

Services offered
> Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.

> Customer Relations: connection to Customer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleServices: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmitted to your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center, either automatically before a service due date or when you request a BMW
service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can determine its position.
> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan
offers a concierge service and information
on route planning, the traffic situation and
weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited
number of calls can be made via the BMW
Assist Response Center, for example if the
mobile phone is not available or discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the BMW
Assist Response Center.
> You can also access the BMW Assist concierge service via the Internet.

Controls
Driving tips

After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
After the BMW Assist system has been deactivated, no BMW Assist service will be available.
The BMW Assist system can be reactivated by
a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center after a
new contract has been signed.

> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle and
position data are transmitted in the process.

Navigation

Many BMW Assist services depend on the individually agreed contract.

Communications Entertainment

BMW Assist provides a number of different services. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency
Request* is sent.

> Automatic Collision Notification: under certain conditions, a connection is established
to the BMW Assist Response Center after a
serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.

Mobility

BMW Assist*

Reference

BMW Assist*

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 215 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

BMW Assist

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 216 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

TeleServices*
TeleServices supports communication with
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center. In this way, the
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center can
plan its work in advance. This shortens the
duration of the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance*.

3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to the BMW
Concierge service.
You are connected to an employee of the BMW
Concierge service to obtain the required information. You can then have the phone number
and address sent to you and, for example, use it
for destination guidance in the navigation system. Many hotels can be booked directly
through the BMW concierge service. When an
information message is received, a list of the
received messages is displayed automatically.

> The offer varies by country.

Messages

> Connection may incur charges.

SMS, BMW Concierge service messages and
My Info messages from the BMW Assist portal
are listed here, refer to Messages on page 208.

> Services may be restricted abroad.

Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Wireless reception is available.
> The engine is running.

Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge service, you can obtain information about, for
example, restaurants, emergency pharmacy
services, gas stations or hotels, as well as
receive the corresponding telephone numbers
and addresses.

Roadside assistance
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance*
should you require help in the event of a breakdown.

Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"

You can then dial a phone number directly or
use an address for destination guidance*.

Starting the concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
The Roadside Assistance number is displayed.
3. Select the number. If a mobile phone* is
paired, a connection is established to BMW
Roadside Assistance.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
TeleServices
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"

1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view to the
sky.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 217 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Switch on the ignition.
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.

Controls

3. "Activate BMW Assist"

Teleservice Help enables an in-depth diagnosis
of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via wireless transmission. Teleservice Help can be
started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance
and termination of the voice connection.

> Subscription to the optional Convenience
Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless network coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display is
current.

Starting BMW Search

Starting Teleservice Help

1. "BMW Assist"

1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. "BMW Search"

2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of Teleservice Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assistance.

Activating BMW Assist*
If the services included in a valid BMW Assist
subscription are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.

3. Select "OK", if necessary.

Navigation

Requirements

Communications Entertainment

Teleservice Help*

BMW Search is always displayed across the full
screen.

Mobility

Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. Teleservice
Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by
Roadside Assistance and termination of the
voice connection.

The BMW Search start page is displayed.

Reference

Teleservice Diagnosis*

BMW Search is an Internet portal that makes
available a number of services for use in the
vehicle, e.g. information on restaurants on your
route, your own address book or an e-mail
account.

Driving tips

BMW Search*

BMW Assist

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 218 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Using BMW Search

5. "User name:"

To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
> Press the controller to display an element.

Opening start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Home"
6. Enter the user name and select "OK".
7. "Password:"
8. Enter the password and select "OK".
9. "OK"

Automatically logging in
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"

You are logged in automatically when
BMW Search is opened.
"Logon automatically"

Logging off
1. "BMW Assist"

Canceling
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"

2. "BMW Search"
3. Open "Options".
4. "User logoff"

Pairing
To display e-mails, contacts from BMW Search
or other personal data, you need to log in.

Activating TeleServices*

1. "BMW Assist"

If the services are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.

2. "BMW Search"
3. Open "Options".
4. "User identification"

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Activate TeleService"

Customer Relations
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.

Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleServices

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 219 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

3. "Start service"

1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"

The Teleservice data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center prior to the service deadline. The center will contact you and a
service appointment can be arranged.
You can check when the BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center was notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Service Request*
You can send a request to your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center to arrange a service
appointment. The Teleservice data is transmitted during a Service Request. Your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center will contact you.

3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"

Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"

BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center*
Address and contact data of the BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Your BMW center"

Navigation

The Customer Relations phone number is displayed. If the vehicle is equipped with the
mobile phone preparation package, a voice
connection is established.

Automatic Service Request*

Communications Entertainment

2. "Customer Relations"

Mobility

1. "BMW Assist"

Reference

Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or BMW TeleServices

Driving tips

Controls

A voice connection is established to Customer
Relations.

BMW Assist

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 220 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"

Service status*
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 221 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 222 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 223 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Mobility
This section helps you maintain your
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance
and roadside assistance.

Refueling

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 224 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Refueling
Switch off the engine before refueling.
When handling fuel, always observe all
applicable precautionary measures and regulations. Never transport reserve fuel containers in
the vehicle. These could become leaky and
cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<

Releasing manually
If an electrical malfunction should occur, you
can unlock the fuel filler door manually.
1. Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.
2. Pull the knob with the gas pump symbol.

Fuel filler door
Opening

Observe the following when refueling

1. Open the fuel filler door. To do this, briefly
press the lower edge.
2. Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket
attached to the fuel filler door.

Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not crush the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly
seal and fuel vapors can escape.<
A message* is displayed if the cap is loose or
missing.

When handling fuels, follow the safety
precautions posted at the filling station.
Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury
or property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler
nozzle during refueling, otherwise this leads to
> premature pump shutoff
> a reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor
recovery system
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 22.5 US gal/85 liters, including the
reserve capacity of approx. 2.1 US gal/8 liters
X5 xDrive48i: approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters
reserve
X6 xDrive50i: approx. 3.2 US gal/12 liters
reserve
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km, otherwise engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<

However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
> BMW X5: 87
> BMW X6: 89
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no affect on the engine life.
Do not use gasoline below the specified
minimum quality, otherwise engine damage can result.<

Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight,
that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an
equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void
the applicable warranties with respect to
defects in materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand

Only refuel with ultra-low sulfur diesel.
The percentage of biodiesel in the fuel
must not exceed 5Ξ, referred to as B5. Do not
refuel with gasoline. If the vehicle has been
refueled with incorrect fuel such as gasoline, do
not start the engine; otherwise, there is a danger of engine damage.<
After incorrect refueling, contact a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.
The fuel filling neck is designed for refueling with diesel nozzles.
If the nozzle cannot be inserted into the fuel
filler pipe of your BMW, please check to make
sure that you are refueling with a diesel fuel
pump and whether this is equipped with a diesel
nozzle.<
In the event the ultra-low sulfur diesel
nozzle cannot be fully inserted into the
fuel filler neck, please contact BMW Roadside
Assistance for instructions on how to add fuel.
For more information on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to page 262.<

Winter diesel
In order to assure the operational reliability of
the diesel engine, during cold seasons, please
refuel with winter diesel, which is sold at filling
stations during this time of year. The standard
fuel filter heating prevents the supply of fuel
from stalling during driving.
Do not mix in any additives or gasoline;
otherwise, there is the risk of engine damage.<

Controls

The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel
with a low sulfur content:
Ultra-low sulfur diesel ASTM D 975-07a.

Driving tips

This gasoline is highly recommended.

Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel

Navigation

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91

BMW X5 with BMW Advanced Diesel:
required fuel

Communications Entertainment

Do not use leaded gasoline, otherwise
damage to the catalytic converter will
result.
Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85%
ethanol, or Flex Fuel, otherwise permanent
damage to the engine and the fuel supply system will result.<

Mobility

Gasoline engine: required fuel

such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

Reference

Fuel specifications

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 225 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Refueling

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 226 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

BMW X5 with BMW Advanced
Diesel

Diesel exhaust fluid at minimum

The concept
BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen oxides
in the diesel exhaust of your vehicle by injecting
the reducing agent diesel exhaust fluid into the
exhaust line. In the catalytic converter, a chemical reaction occurs that minimizes nitrogen
oxides.
In order to be able to start the engine in the
usual way, there must be a sufficient supply of
diesel exhaust fluid in the separate reservoir.

Even with a display of -- mls, the engine will
continue to run, provided that it is not switched
off, and all other operating requirements are
met, e.g. sufficient fuel.

System heating

Do not drive until the displayed remaining
distance runs out. Otherwise, it may not
be possible to restart the engine.<

In order to bring the system to operating temperature after a cold start of the engine, the
automatic transmission shifts into the next
higher gear at a later point.

Reserve display
A display in the instrument panel informs you
about the remaining distance can be covered
with the amount of fuel currently in the tank.

Incorrect fueling
The warning lamp lights up:
The reservoir has been filled with an
incorrect fluid.
Please contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

Having diesel exhaust fluid refilled
Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center refills
the diesel exhaust fluid as part of the regular
maintenance. If you adhere to this maintenance
schedule, it is usually not necessary to refill any
fluids between the maintenance dates.

The reserve display appears approx.
1,000 miles/1,600 km before the end of the
tank.
As soon as the reserve display has
appeared in the instrument panel, have
the diesel exhaust fluid refilled to prevent the
engine from being unable to restart.<

Under certain circumstances, e.g. due to a particularly sporty driving style or operation of the
vehicle at high altitudes, it may be necessary to
refill fluids between maintenance dates.
As soon as the reserve display has appeared in
the instrument panel, have the diesel exhaust
fluid refilled to prevent the engine from being
unable to restart.
You can have the fluid refilled by a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.

Diesel exhaust fluid at low
temperatures
Due to its physical properties, it may be
necessary to replenish the level of diesel
226
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

exhaust fluid at temperatures below +237/
-56 even between the regular maintenance
intervals.
If the fluid needs to be refilled, this will be indicated with the reserve display in the instrument
panel, refer to page 226.<

Refilling quantity

Only refill the diesel exhaust fluid
yourself in exceptional circumstances

2. Fit releasing tool from onboard tool kit, refer
to page 250 into place and open the lock,
refer to arrow.

Refilling BMW diesel exhaust fluid
1. Set bottle into place and rotate until it
comes into contact with the stop, refer to
arrow.

2. Press bottle down, refer to arrow.
The reservoir of the vehicle is filled.

Suitable diesel exhaust fluid

Mobility

> Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid.
This bottle and its special adapter permit
convenient refilling with diesel exhaust
fluid.

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

1. Open hood, refer to page 239.

Communications Entertainment

Do not allow diesel exhaust fluid to come
into contact with you. This can lead to
skin and eye irritation. Wear protective goggles
and gloves as needed. Follow the safety
instructions on the bottle.
When opening the bottle or reservoir, pungent
smelling vapors can escape. Before refilling,
close the vehicle completely so that the vapors
do not get into the interior of the vehicle. When
handling diesel exhaust fluid in enclosed
spaces, make sure to have sufficient ventilation.
After handling diesel exhaust fluid, wash hands
thoroughly. Failure to do so may lead to irritation, e.g. due to inadvertent contact with the
eyes.
If eye irritation occurs, immediately rinse eyes
with ample water and contact a doctor if necessary.
If diesel exhaust fluid comes into contact with
surfaces of your vehicle, rinse the affected surfaces with water or else damage may occur.
Keep diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children.<

Open reservoir for diesel exhaust fluid

> Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32
You can get diesel exhaust fluid at your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

Reference

In order to get your vehicle to reach the nearest
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center, you may
refill the diesel exhaust fluid yourself, making
sure to heed the warning notices.

Refilling quantity at the start of the reserve display: approx. 0,75 US gal/2.7 liters reserve

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 227 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Refueling

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 228 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

3. The reservoir is full when the fill level in the
bottle stops changing. It is not possible to
overfill.
Pull bottle back, refer to arrow, and unscrew
it.

Reserve display

After refilling, the reserve continues to appear
after the engine is restarted. After the vehicle
has been driven for a few more minutes, this
display will disappear.

Closing reservoir
After the reservoir is filled, close it again with the
releasing tool.

After refilling diesel exhaust fluid
Incorrect fluid
After refilling with the incorrect fluid, e.g.
antifreeze for windshield wiper fluid, do
not start the engine because this could result in
a fire hazard.<
Contact your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center.

Bottle disposal
You can have bottles for diesel exhaust
fluid properly disposed of at your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Only dispose of empty bottles in your household garbage if the local legal regulations permit
it.<

Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it as needed, even on the
compact tire*: at least twice a month and before
starting long trips. If you fail to observe this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that can not only
compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but
also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident. Do not drive with depressurized, i.e. flat
tires, except run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your vehicle's handling and braking
response. Attempts to drive on a flat tire can
lead to a loss of control over the vehicle.<

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for speeds
up to 100 mph/160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h,
adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation
pressures listed on the following pages in the
column Traveling speeds up to max. of
100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving
comfort.
These pressure specifications can be found on
the door post when you open the driver's door.

After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 93, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 94.<

The permissible top speed for these tire
inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.
Do not exceed this speed, otherwise tire damage and accidents may result.<

Pressure specifications

Tire inflation pressures for speeds
above 100 mph/160 km/h

The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes and tire brands respectively
approved and recommended by BMW; a list of
these is available from your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<

In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please
observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures
for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from
the relevant table on the following pages.
Otherwise tire damage and accidents could
occur.<

Controls

> Load conditions

Driving tips

Checking pressure

> Tire sizes of your vehicle

Navigation

The condition of the tires and the maintenance
of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only
to the tire's service life, but also to driving comfort and most importantly, driving safety.

Communications Entertainment

Information for your safety

For correct identification of the right tire inflation pressure for your tires, observe the following:

Mobility

Tire inflation pressure

Reference

Wheels and tires

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 229 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Wheels and tires

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 230 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits, otherwise violations of the law could
occur.

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive30i/X5 xDrive48i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows of
seats
Tire size

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

60/420

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL

32/220

35/240

41/280

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL

32/220

36/250

35/240

41/280

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL

32/220

35/240

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL

32/220

36/250

without sport package:

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL

33/230

35/240

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL

33/230

36/250

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL

33/230

36/250

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL

36/250

39/270

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL

32/220

35/240

41/280

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL

32/220

36/250

35/240

41/280

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL

32/220

39/270

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL

32/220

41/280

33/230

38/260

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL

33/230

39/270

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL

33/230

38/260

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL

36/250

42/290

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL

Mobility

with sport package:

Driving tips

60/420

Navigation

60/420

Communications Entertainment

60/420

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.

Reference

Compact wheel*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M

Controls

All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 231 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Wheels and tires

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 232 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Tire inflation pressures X5 xDrive30i/X5 xDrive48i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows
of seats
Tire size

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

without sport package:
255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL

33/230

41/280

38/260

45/310

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL

36/250

44/300

41/280

48/330

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL

32/220

35/240

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL

38/260

42/290

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL

33/230

35/240

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL

39/270

42/290

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL

35/240

38/260

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL

42/290

45/310

255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL

33/230

41/280

38/260

45/310

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL

36/250

44/300

41/280

48/330

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL

32/220

41/280

Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL

38/260

48/330

33/230

41/280

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL

39/270

48/330

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL

35/240

42/290

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL

42/290

49/340

with sport package:

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.

Tire inflation pressure X6 xDrive35i
Tire size

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

Controls

All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 V XL
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 V XL

35/240

36/250

42/290

32/220

36/250

32/220

38/260

Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL

32/220

36/250

Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL

32/220

36/250

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL

32/220

38/260

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL

33/230

39/270

60/420

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.

Driving tips

32/220

Navigation

255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL

Compact wheel*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 233 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Wheels and tires

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 234 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Tire inflation pressures for X6 xDrive50i
Tire size

Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds
including those exceeding
100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications
in the table are indicated in
psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL
255/50 R 19 107 V M+S XL

33/230

Front: 255/50 R 19 107 W XL
Rear: 285/45 R 19 111 W XL
Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL
Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL

33/230

41/280

36/250

42/290

36/250

42/290

36/250

44/300

36/250

44/300

Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL

36/250

45/310

Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL

36/250

45/310

60/420

Compact wheel*:
T 155/90 D 18 113 M
T 155/80 R 19 114 M

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 271.

42/290

Controls

DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<

Tread wear

Tire Identification Number

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.

Traction

Speed letter
Q = up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T = up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H = up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
V = up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
W = up to 167 mph (270 km/h)
Y = up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

DOT code:
e.g.

DOT xxxx xxx 0809

Manufacturer code
for tire make
Tire size and tire design
Tire age

Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT ... 0809 indicates that the
tire was manufactured in week 8 of 2009.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.<

BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.

Driving tips

255/55 R 18 109 H

Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Belted construction – radial
Rim diameter in inches
Carrying capacity ID-code
(not in ZR tires)
Speed code letter
(in ZR tires before the R)

Navigation

e.g.

Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A

Communications Entertainment

Tire size

Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:

Mobility

Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Reference

Tire identification marks

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 235 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Wheels and tires

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 236 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 237.

M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than summer tires.

XL
Indicates specially reinforced tires.

Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legislation only specifies a minimum tread depth of

0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. For the sake of
safety, new tires should be installed.

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base are
distributed over the tire's circumference and
are marked on the side of the tire with TWI –
Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread has been
driven down to the wear indicators, a tread
depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.

Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more susceptible to road hazards and consequential damages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for example, be caused by driving over curbs. These
kinds of problems may also be signaled by other
changes in vehicle response, such as a strong
tendency to pull to the left or right.
In these cases, reduce speed immediately and have wheels and tires thoroughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or
tire shop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If necessary, have the vehicle towed
there. Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely
dangerous to vehicle occupants and other road
users.<

To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 93
> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Message with low tire inflation pressure page 95

New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center or a tire shop that works according to
BMW repair procedures with correspondingly
trained personnel. If this work is not carried out
properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that
the new wheels are balanced.<

Retreaded tires
BMW does not recommend that you use
retreaded tires, as driving safety may be
impaired. The causes for this include the possibly different tire casing structures and the often
wide variations in their age, which can result in a
limited service life.<

When changing to larger wheels and tires,
it may be necessary to make changes to
the wheelwell trim piece, as otherwise road
users could be endangered or the vehicle could
be damaged. Only have this work carried out by
a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works in accordance with BMW
guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel.<
You can ask your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center for the correct wheel/tire combination.
The correct wheel/tire combination also affects
various systems whose function would otherwise be impaired, e.g. ABS, DSC, xDrive,
Dynamic Performance Control in the BMW X6,
or Flat Tire Monitor.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel and tire
combination remounted on the vehicle as soon
as possible.

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire.
Run-flat tires consist of partially self-contained
tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforcement ensures that the tire retains some residual
safety in the event of pressure drop and driving
remains possible to a restricted degree.

BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufacturing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions than the
approved units – these differences could lead to
body contact, and with it the risk of severe accidents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot be held liable for driving
safety.<

Communications Entertainment

When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount Run-Flat Tires for your own safety. Your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be
happy to advise you.

Mobility

The right wheels and tires

Reference

Run-flat tires

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 237 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Wheels and tires

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 238 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Wheels with electronics for
TPM Tire Pressure Monitor
When mounting new tires or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use
wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the
Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire,
refer to page 94. Your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center will be happy to advise you on
this subject.

Recommended tire brands

Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Always
protect tires against all contact with oil, grease
and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of
the tire.

Rotating wheels between axles
Even with tires of the same size, BMW
recommends that you not rotate the front
tires to the rear or vice versa as this can negatively affect handling characteristics.
When the vehicle is equipped with different
tires sizes*, rotating tires from one axle to the
other is not permitted.<

Snow chains*
Certain tire makes are recommended by BMW
depending on the tire size. You can recognize
these from the clearly visible BMW marking on
the tire sidewall.
When used properly, these tires comply with
the most demanding standards for safety and
vehicle response.

Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends using winter tires for operation on winter road or at temperatures below
+457/+76. Although all-season M+S tires
provide better winter traction than summer
tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Paying attention to speed
Always observe the maximum permissible speed for the winter tires, otherwise
tire damage may occur, which can result in accidents.<

BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains,
classifies them as road-safe and recommends
them. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
can provide you with this information.
BMW X5: use is only permitted in pairs on the
rear wheels with tires of the size:
> 255/55 R 18
> 255/50 R 19
BMW X6: it is only permissible to use snow
chains in pairs, on the 255/50 R 19 rear wheels.
Observe the manufacturer's instructions when
mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed
of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.
After mounting snow chains, do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor*, as otherwise
incorrect displays can occur.
When you are driving with snow chains, it can
be beneficial to activate DTC briefly, refer to
page 89.<

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 239 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Under the hood

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/
40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard
to engage.

Hood

Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear, otherwise injuries may
result.
If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving your vehicle, you
should stop at once and close it securely.<

Communications Entertainment

Releasing

Driving tips

Controls

Closing

Navigation

Never attempt to perform any service or
repair operations on your vehicle without
the required professional technical training. If
you do not know what repair procedures to follow, have work on your vehicle done only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly,
there is a danger of subsequent damage and
related safety hazards.<

Pull lever.

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Reference

Mobility

Opening

Under the hood

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 240 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Engine compartment
BMW X5

Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 69

Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 262

Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 243

Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil on page 242

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 241 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Starting-aid terminal, refer to page 262

Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 243

Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil on page 242

Communications Entertainment

Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp
and windshield cleaning systems, refer to
page 69

Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.

1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"

Checking engine oil level
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil
level check.

Mobility

The condition for the most accurate indication
of the oil level possible is measurement with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. following
an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km.
You can display the oil level while driving or
when stopped on a level surface with the engine
running.

Reference

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

BMW X6

Under the hood

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 242 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

3. "Engine oil level"

Adding engine oil
BMW X5

Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK"
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This process can take approx. 3 minutes
when stopped on a level surface and
approx. 5 minutes while driving.

BMW X6

> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add
1 quart!":
At the next opportunity, add 1 US quart/liter
of engine oil.
If the oil level displayed is below minimum, add engine oil immediately.
Failure to do so may lead to engine damage.<
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked.":
Have the vehicle checked immediately, otherwise engine damage may
result if too much oil has been added.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked.":
Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to
drive, note the recalculated remaining mileage until the next oil change service, refer to
Service requirements on page 74. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.

Do not add 1 US quart/liter of oil until a corresponding message is shown on the Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km,
otherwise the engine could be damaged.<
Continuous exposure to used oil has
caused cancer in laboratory testing.
For this reason, any skin areas that come into
contact with oil should be thoroughly washed
with soap and water.
Keep oil, grease etc. out of reach of children and
observe the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.<

Oil change
Only have an oil change carried out by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop
that works in accordance with BMW guidelines
and uses appropriately trained personnel.

Do not use oil additives, as these may
result in engine damage.<

Alternative oil grades
If none of the approved oils is available at a
given time, you can also use smaller quantities
of other oils between oil changes. The packaging must include one of the following indications of oil specifications.

Gasoline engines
> Preferred: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-01 FE
> Alternative: BMW Longlife-98, API SM or
higher

Diesel engines

Only use suitable additives, otherwise
engine damage may result. The additives
present a health hazard; observe the instructions on the containers.<
Comply with the appropriate environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant additives.<

Controls

Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a
coolant additive. Not all commercially available
additives are suitable for your BMW. Your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center can recommend
suitable additives.

Driving tips

You can also call BMW of North America at
1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at
www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<

Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the hood until the engine has
cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counterclockwise to allow any accumulated pressure to escape, then continue turning to
open.
3. The coolant level is correct when the coolant level is between the MIN and MAX
marks, refer to the diagram adjacent to the
filler neck.

> BMW Longlife-04

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.

Viscosity grades

5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.

Viscosity is a measure of an oil's flow rating and
is specified in SAE grades.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible.

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on
the climatic conditions in the region in which
you normally drive your BMW.

Mobility

Approved oils belong to the SAE classifications 0W-40, 0W-30, 5W-40 and
5W-30.<

Navigation

Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
will be happy to answer more detailed
questions about approved oils.<

Coolant

Communications Entertainment

The quality of the engine oil selected has critical
significance for the operation and service life of
an engine. BMW continuously approves specific oils after confirming their suitability for use
in its vehicles with extensive testing.

These oils can be used for driving at all outside
temperatures.

Reference

Approved engine oils

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 243 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Maintenance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 244 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Maintenance
BMW maintenance system

> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations

Service data in remote control

The BMW maintenance system supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The service schedule also
includes operations related to the vehicle's
comfort and convenience features, such as
replacement of the filters for the inside air.
The ultimate objective is to ensure economical
maintenance by providing the ideal service for
your vehicle.
Should the day come when you decide to sell
your BMW, a complete dealer service history
will prove to be an asset of inestimable value.

CBS Condition Based Service
Sensors and special algorithms take the different driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
You can set the Control Display to show
remaining distances and times of selected
maintenance intervals and legally mandated
deadlines, refer to page 74:
> Engine oil

Your vehicle stores the information required for
maintenance continuously in the remote control during driving. After accessing the data
stored in the remote control, your BMW Service
Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of
service procedures for your own individual vehicle. You should therefore hand over the remote
control you last used to drive to the BMW Service Advisor when you take your vehicle in for
service.
Make sure the date is set correctly, refer
to page 80, otherwise the effectiveness
of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.<

Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and
Warranty and Service Guide Booklet
for Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service requirements.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.
Take the time to ensure that these service procedures are confirmed by entries in your vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the specified regular maintenance.<

> Brake pads, front and rear separately
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check

Data recorders
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or several measuring and diagnosis modules, or with
a device for recording or transmitting certain
vehicle data or information. If you have also subscribed to BMW Assist, certain vehicle data can
be transmitted or recorded to enable corresponding services.

Driving tips

Components which are decisive for the
exhaust-gas composition can be checked via
the OBD socket with a device.

Controls

Socket for OBD Onboard
Diagnostics interface

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 245 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

This socket is located to the left on the driver's
side, on the underside of the instrument cluster
under a cover.

Navigation

Exhaust-gas values

Communications Entertainment

The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing an elevated
amount of exhaust emissions. Continued driving is possible. Have the vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In
this case, you should reduce your speed and
proceed to the nearest BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center. Heavy engine misfiring causes
serious damage to the emission-relevant components, especially the catalytic converter,
within a short time.

Reference

Mobility

The warning lamp lights up if the fuel
cap has not been properly tightened
and the OBD system detects the
escape of fuel vapors. Check that the fuel cap is
correctly seated and tighten it until you hear a
clearly audible click.

Care

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 246 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Care
Car-care products
For the cleaning and care of your vehicle, BMW
recommends using only products that BMW
has approved for this purpose.
Regular cleaning and care make a significant
contribution to retaining your BMW's value.
The BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center will be
happy to consult you on products and services
for the cleaning and care of your BMW.
Genuine BMW Care Products are materials tested, laboratory tested, and tested in
actual use. They offer optimum care and protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents; they can damage your vehicle.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or pose health risks.
You should therefore heed the warnings and
hazard indications on the packaging. Open the
doors or windows on your vehicle whenever
cleaning the interior. Make sure there is sufficient ventilation in enclosed spaces. Use only
products that are formulated for vehicle cleaning.<

Exterior care
Washing your vehicle
In the winter months, it is especially
important to ensure that the vehicle is
washed on a regular basis. Otherwise, significant soiling and road salt can cause damage to
the vehicle.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them. Failure to do so
may lead to a reduction in braking efficiency and
also to corrosion of the brake rotors.<

Car washes
Give preference to cloth car washes.
Before driving into the car wash, make sure that
it is suitable for your BMW. Pay attention to the
following points:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 269.
> If necessary, fold in exterior mirrors, refer to
page 52.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm, otherwise there is danger of damaging chassis parts.<
Preparations for driving into the car wash:
> Deactivate rain sensor* to prevent
unwanted wiper activation.
> BMW X5: deactivate rear window wiper and
protect it from damage. Take appropriate
protective measures; inquiring with the car
wash operator as needed.
> Remove add-on parts such as spoilers or
phone antennas if they risk being damaged.
Before driving into the car wash, observe the
following so that the vehicle is able to roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with comfort access.
2. Shift into transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Deactivate Automatic Hold, refer to
page 62.
5. Switch off the engine.
6. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.

Mixed tires*
Before driving into a car wash, make sure
that the vehicle width is not too large for
the car wash, as otherwise the vehicle and the
car wash could be damaged.<

When washing the vehicle by hand, use plenty
of water and car washing shampoo. Clean the
vehicle with gentle pressure using a sponge or a
washing brush.
Before cleaning the windshield, deactivate the rain sensor or switch off the ignition to prevent unwanted wiper operation.<
Follow local guidelines for washing vehicles by hand.<

Repairing paint damage
Repair stone damage or scratches immediately, depending on the severity of the
damage, to prevent the formation of rust.<
BMW recommends having paint damage professionally repaired using Genuine BMW finish
materials in accordance with factory guidelines.

Waxing
Sealant is required when water no longer beads
on the clean surface of the paint. Use only products that contain carnauba wax or synthetic wax
to seal your finish.

Rubber gaskets

Headlamps
Do not rub dry and never use abrasives or
strong solvents to clean the covers.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with plenty of
water.
Use a window de-icer to remove accumulated
ice and snow, not a scraper.

Windows
Use a glass cleaner to clean the inside and outside surfaces of the windows and the glass surfaces of the mirrors.
Do not use quartz-containing cleansers
to clean glass surfaces of the mirrors.<

Treat only with water or a rubber care product.
To avoid noise or damage, do not use
products that contain silicone to care for
rubber gaskets.<

Chrome components
Particularly after exposure to road salt, thoroughly cleanse parts like the radiator grille, door
handles, or window frames with plenty of water
with shampoo added to it. For additional treatment, use chrome polish.

Alloy wheels
Depending on your system, braking can generate dust, which settles on the light-alloy wheels.
Remove this dust regularly with acid-free wheel
cleaner.

Controls
Driving tips

Immediately remove particularly aggressive
substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease,
brake fluid, tree resin, or bird droppings; otherwise, they may damage your paint.

Navigation

Hand washing

Regionally occurring environmental factors can
affect and damage vehicle finish. It is therefore
important to tailor the frequency and extent of
your car care accordingly.

Communications Entertainment

Do not spray the sensors and cameras,
e.g. of Park Distance Control, Top View,
or rear view camera, with high-pressure cleaners for long periods and keep the spray nozzle
at least 12 in/30 cm away from them.<

Regular care helps your vehicle retain its value
and protects the paint from the long-term
effects of aggressive substances.

Mobility

When using steam cleaners or high-pressure cleaning jets, make sure to maintain
a sufficient distance and stay below a maximum
temperature of 140 7/606.
Insufficient distance or excessive pressure or
temperature can damage parts of the vehicle or
can result in water penetration. Follow the operating instructions for the high-pressure cleaning jets.<

Caring for the vehicle finish

Reference

Steam cleaners/high-pressure
cleaning jets

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 247 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Care

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 248 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Do not use aggressive, acid-containing,
strongly alkaline, or coarse cleansers and
do not use steam cleaners at temperatures
greater than 1407/606; otherwise you may
damage your vehicle.<

Aluminum running boards
A rust film on the aluminum running boards can
be removed with a special cleaning agent.

Outside sensors/cameras
Make sure that sensors and cameras outside the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance Control, Top View, or rear view camera, are kept
clean and free of ice in order to assure full functionality.<

Interior care
Upholstery materials/cloth-covered
paneling
Clean regularly with a vacuum cleaner in order
to remove surface dirt.
In the event of more serious soiling such as beverage stains, use a soft sponge or a lint-free
microfiber cloth in combination with suitable
interior cleaners. Follow the instructions on the
packaging.
Clean upholstery material over a large
area extending out to the seams. Avoid
intense friction.<
Open Velcro fasteners on pants or other
items of clothing can cause damage to
the seat covering. Make sure that the Velcro
fasteners are closed.<

Leather/leather-covered paneling
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight patterns in the
grain are part of the typical properties of a natural leather.<
Dust and dirt from the road chafe in pores and
folds and result in considerable wear and cause
the leather surface to become prematurely brittle. We therefore suggest that you clean the

leather with a dust cloth or vacuum cleaner at
regular intervals.
Particularly with light-colored leather, make
sure to clean it regularly since it has a greater
tendency to become soiled.
Treat the leather twice a year with a leather
lotion since dirt and grease harm the protective
layer of the leather.

Carpets/cargo bay
Floor carpets and floor mats can be vacuumed
or cleaned with interior cleaner when they are
more heavily soiled.
Floor mats can be removed for cleaning. When
inserting into place, make sure that the seat
rails do not protrude over the floor mats; otherwise floor mats can be damaged.
Fluff on new floor mats is a result of the production process and can be removed by repeated
vacuuming.

Plastic components inside
> Vinyl upholstery surfaces
> Lamp lenses
> Cover glass of instrument cluster
> Matt parts
should be cleaned with water and, if necessary,
solvent-free plastic cleaner.

Fine wooden components
Use a damp cloth to clean fine wooden trim
panels and components. Follow up by drying
with a soft cloth.

Safety belts
Soiled seatbelt straps hinder the reeling, thus
reducing safety.
Do not use chemical cleansers as they
can destroy the webbing.<

Inside sensors/cameras
Clean inside sensors and cameras, such as
those of the high-beam assistant, using a lintfree cloth moistened with glass cleaner.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 249 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Displays
Clean displays like the radio or the instrument
cluster using a display-cleaning cloth or a soft,
nonabrasive lint-free cloth.

Controls

Avoid using excessive pressure when
cleaning displays; otherwise, you could
damage them.<

Driving tips

Never use chemical-based cleansers or
household scouring products. Keep all
liquids away from the equipment. Otherwise
surfaces or electrical components could be
attacked or damaged.<

CD/DVD-player
Do not use cleaning CDs; they can damage parts of the player.<

Navigation

Storing your vehicle

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

When storing your vehicle for longer than three
months, please seek the advice of your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop
that works in accordance with BMW guidelines.

Replacing components

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 250 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Replacing components
Onboard toolkit

The onboard toolkit is located in the cargo bay
under the floor panel.

BMW X5: rear

1. Lift off the wiper arm completely and pull off
the wiper blade, refer to arrow.
2. Mount the new wiper blade and press on
until it is heard to engage.

Replacing wiper blades
Lamps and bulbs

Front

Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribution to vehicle safety. You must be duly diligent
in replacing them. BMW recommends having
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center perform any work that you do not feel competent to
perform yourself or that is not described here.

2. Swing the wiper blade upward.

Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its
metal socket.<

3. Remove the wiper blade toward the windshield, refer to arrow.

A replacement bulb set is available from your
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center.

1. Fold down the wiper arm.

Only replace bulbs when cool, as otherwise you may be burned.<
Whenever you perform any work on the
electrical system, turn off the systems/
consumers involved to prevent short circuits
from occurring. To avoid possible injury or
equipment damage when replacing bulbs,
observe any instructions provided by the bulb
manufacturer.<

1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.

Controls

For bulbs for which replacement is not
described and for checking and adjusting
headlamp aim, please contact your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs

Turn signals, front
24-Watt bulb, PY24W

Navigation

1. Unscrew bulb holder with bulb to the left,
refer to arrow, and replace.

BMW X5: changing lamps
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and
the probability of a failure is very low. If a lamp
should nevertheless fail, you can continue driving cautiously with fog lamps* provided that
this is permitted by the country-specific laws.
Have work on the xenon light unit including changing the bulb carried out only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<

Halogen bulbs:
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime driving lamps
35-Watt bulb, H8
The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear
safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the
bulb is accidentally damaged during replacement.<

Driving tips

3. Install in the reverse order.

2. Install in the reverse order.

Side marker lamps, rear
To replace, please go to a BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained personnel.

Tail lamps

Communications Entertainment

Do not remove the covers, and never
stare into the unfiltered light for several
hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

2. Turn the bulbs to the left, pull off the connector and replace.

> Turn signals, brake lamps: 21-watt bulb,
P21W
> Backup lamps and brake force display: 16watt bulb, W16W
> Rear lamp: LED technology.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair

Mobility

Light-emitting diodes installed behind translucent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls and displays in your vehicle. These
light-emitting diodes, which operate using a
concept similar to that applied in conventional
lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 lightemitting diodes.

Reference

When performing care and maintenance on the
headlamps, please observe the information on
page 247.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 251 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Replacing components

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 252 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.

Arrangement of tail lamps

Turn signal
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning triangle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.
3. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.

Rear lamp

Brake force display

Turn signal

Brake lamp/rear lamp/side marker lamp

Backup lamp

4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

Brake lamp

5. Remount the side panel.

Brake lamps

Backup lamp

1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.

2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning triangle* if necessary. Fold up the insulation.

3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
and remove.

3. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.

4. Remove the upper bulb for replacement.
Apply gentle pressure to the lower bulb
while turning it to the left for removal and
replacement.

4. Remove the bulb for replacement.
5. Remount the side panel.

5. Remount the side panel.

Brake force display

License plate lamp
5-watt bulb, C11 12W
1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screwdriver, refer to arrow 1.

3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and
engage it.
5. Before installing the cap, unclip the cargo
bay lamp.
Then lay the cap on its upper side and close
it, refer to arrow.

2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinstall the lamp.

Center brake lamp
This lamp uses LED technology for operation.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.

Driving tips

Controls

1. Carefully remove the cover in the liftgate
panel with a screwdriver.

6. Position the cargo bay lamp and clip it in,
refer to arrow.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 253 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

These bulbs have a very long service life and
the probability of a failure is very low. If a lamp
should nevertheless fail, you can continue driving cautiously with fog lamps* provided that
this is permitted by the country-specific laws.

Reference

Xenon lamps

Mobility

BMW X6: changing lamps

Replacing components

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 254 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Have work on the xenon light unit including changing the bulb carried out only by
your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a
workshop that works according to BMW repair
procedures with correspondingly trained personnel. Due to the high voltage present in the
system, there is a danger of fatal injuries when
work is carried out improperly.<

Side marker lamps
5-Watt bulb, WY5W XLL
1. Rotate the bulb holder to the left and
remove.

Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime driving lamps
35-Watt bulb, H8
The bulb is pressurized. Therefore, wear
safety glasses and protective gloves.
Otherwise there is a danger of injuries if the
bulb is accidentally damaged during replacement.<

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb holder and
replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.

1. Turn the cover to the left and remove.

Turn signals, front
24-Watt bulb, PY24W
1. Rotate bulb holder to the left and remove it
along with the bulb.

2. Left side of vehicle:
Rotate the bulb holder to the right, refer to
arrow, and remove.
Right side of vehicle:
Rotate the bulb holder to the left and
remove.

2. Rotate the bulb to the right along with the
socket and replace.
3. Install in the reverse order.

Tail lamps
> Turn signals, backup lamps: 21-watt bulb,
H21W
> Brake lamps, brake force display: 21-watt
bulb, P21W
3. Disconnect plug and replace bulb.
4. Install in the reverse order.

> Rear lamp: LED technology.
In case of a defect, please go to a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair

procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.

3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.

Controls

Arrangement of tail lamps

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 255 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Backup lamp

Brake lamp/rear lamp

1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.

Backup lamp

Turn signal

2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning triangle* if necessary.
3. Remove bulb holder along with bulb and
replace.

Brake lamps
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning triangle* if necessary.
3. Rotate the relevant bulb socket to the left
and remove.

4. Install in the reverse order.

Brake force display
1. Carefully remove the cover in the liftgate
panel with a screwdriver.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.

Navigation

Brake force display/rear lamps

Communications Entertainment

Driving tips

4. Install in the reverse order.

Turn signal
1. Open the side panel in the cargo bay.
2. Remove the first-aid kit* and warning triangle* if necessary.

2. Rotate the bulb socket to the left and
remove.
255

Reference

Mobility

5. Install in the reverse order.

Replacing components

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 256 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. As a result, it is not necessary to
change the wheel immediately in the case of air
loss in the event of a breakdown.
To continue driving with a damaged tire:
> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of
a flat tire page 93
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replacement.
4. Insert the bulb socket in the liftgate and
engage it.
5. Replace the cover.

License plate lamp
5-Watt bulb, C5W
1. Slide the lamp to the right with a screwdriver, refer to arrow 1.

> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Message with low tire inflation pressure page 95
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires, page 237.
When mounting new tires, or changing from
summer to winter tires or vice versa, use run-flat
tires for your own safety. No spare tire is available in case of a flat tire. Your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center will be happy to advise
you. Also refer to New wheels and tires,
page 237.
BMW X6: do not rotate the front wheels to
the rear or vice versa, as otherwise the
handling characteristics will be negatively
affected.<
Suitable tools for changing tires are available as accessories at your BMW Sports
Activity Vehicle Center.<

Jacking points for vehicle jack
2. Remove the lamp, arrow 2.
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Reinstall the lamp.

The jacking points for the vehicle jack are
located in the positions shown.

Compact wheel*
Safety precautions in the event of a flat
tire or wheel change: park the vehicle as
far as possible from passing traffic and on solid
256
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 602 756 - © 06/09 BMW AG

Vehicle jack*

Vehicle jack crank*

Lug wrench*

Controls
2. Unscrew the wing nut 1.
3. Remove the washer 2 laterally.
4. Remove the compact wheel.

Driving tips

1. Remove the tool mount.

1. Observe the safety precautions above.
2. Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.

Jacking up vehicle
1. Position the vehicle jack at the jacking point
closest to the wheel so that the entire surface of the jack base rests on the ground
perpendicularly beneath the jacking point.
The vehicle jack is designed for
changing wheels only. Do not attempt
to raise another vehicle model with it or to
raise any load of any kind. To do so could
cause accidents and personal injury.<

Navigation

Preparing wheel change

Communications Entertainment

To avoid rattling noises later on, note the positions of the tools before removing them, then
return them to their initial positions after completing work.
The tools are located in the mount under the
floor panel flap.

The compact wheel is located in the cargo bay
under the floor panel.

Mobility

What you will need

Removing compact wheel

Reference

ground. Switch on the hazard warning flashers.
Set the parking brake and engage transmission
position P.
Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle
and ensure that they remain outside the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a
guardrail.
If a warning triangle* or portable hazard warning
lamp* is required, set it up on the roadside at an
appropriate distance from the rear of the vehicle. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations.
Change the wheel only on a level, firm surface
which is not slippery. The vehicle or the jack
could slip to the side if you attempt to raise the
vehicle on a soft or slippery surface such as
snow, ice, tiles, etc.
Position the jack on a firm support surface.
Do not use a wooden block or similar object as a
support base for the jack, as this would prevent
it from extending to its full support height and
reduce its load-carrying capacity.
To avoid serious or fatal injury: never lie under
the vehicle, and never start the engine while it is
supported by the jack.<

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 257 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Replacing components

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 258 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Guide the jack head into the rectangular
recess of the jacking point when cranking
up, refer to illustration detail.

3. Check and correct the tire inflation pressure
at the earliest opportunity.
Protect valve stems with valve screw
caps against dirt and contamination.
Dirt in valve stems is a frequent source of
gradual air loss.<
4. Initialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to
page 93, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 94.
5. Replace the damaged tire as soon as possible and have the new wheel/tire balanced.

3. Jack the vehicle up until the wheel you are
changing is raised from the ground.

Mounting a wheel
1. Unscrew the lug bolts and remove the
wheel.
2. Remove accumulations of mud or dirt from
the mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub. Also clean the lug bolts.
3. Position the new wheel or compact wheel.
Secure the wheel by screwing at least two
lug bolts into opposite bolt holes.
When you mount wheels other than Genuine BMW light-alloy wheels, different lug
bolts may also be required.
4. Screw in the remaining lug bolts. Tighten all
the bolts securely in a diagonal pattern.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack from
beneath the vehicle.

After mounting
1. Tighten the lug bolts in a diagonal pattern.
To ensure safety, always have the
lug bolts checked with a calibrated
torque wrench as soon as possible to
ensure that they are tightened to the specified torque. Otherwise, incorrectly tightened lug bolts are a hidden safety risk. The
tightening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.<
2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo bay.
The defective wheel cannot be stored
under the floor panel flap due to its
size.<

Driving with compact wheel
Drive reservedly and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Otherwise,
changes in the driving characteristics could
result, for example reduced track stability on
braking, extended braking distance, and altered
self-steering characteristics in the limit range.
In conjunction with winter tires, these characteristics are more pronounced.<
Only one compact wheel may be
mounted. Restore the wheels and tires to
their original size as quickly as possible. Failure
to do so is a safety risk.<

Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate climate. Your BMW Sports Activity Vehicle Center
will be glad to advise in all matters concerning
the battery.

Charging battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine switched off. Connections, refer to
Jump starting on page 262.

Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of following
replacement at your BMW Sports Activity

> Radio
Radio stations must be stored again, refer
to page 164.

In interior
The fuses are located in the front passenger
footwell on the underside of the instrument
cluster.
1. Unscrew screws, refer to arrows, of footwell
trim panel.

> Navigation system
You must wait until the system becomes
functional again, refer to page 157.
> Glass sunroof/panorama glass sunroof
It may only be possible to raise the glass
sunroof/panorama glass sunroof The system must be initialized, refer to page 42.
> Digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 118.

2. Lay the trim panel in the footwell.
3. Unscrew the screw, arrow 1, and fold down
the fuse carrier, arrow 2.

> Active steering
The system automatically initializes for a
short time as you drive. During this time, the
system is deactivated, refer to page 97.
> xDrive
The system automatically initializes as you
drive. During this time, indicator lamps light
up. If the lamps do not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Before removing the vehicle from storage, consult your BMW Sports Activity
Vehicle Center.<

Controls
Driving tips

> Time and Date
The values must be updated again, refer to
pages 79, 80.

Spare fuses can be obtained from your BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle.

Navigation

> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 45.

A pair of plastic tweezers and instructions for
fuse allocation is stored with the fuses in the
cargo bay.

4. Replace the fuse concerned.
5. Installation is carried out in the reverse
order of removal. Ensure correct and secure
attachment of the footwell trim panel in the
process.
259

Communications Entertainment

Following a temporary power failure, e.g. due to
a discharged battery, the use of some equipment will be restricted, requiring its reinitialization. In the same way, individual settings are lost
and must be updated again:

Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating, as
this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately
resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

Mobility

Power failure

Fuses

Reference

Vehicle Center or bring them to a collection
point. Maintain the battery in an upright position
for transport and storage. Always restrain the
battery to prevent it from tipping over during
transport.<

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 259 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Replacing components

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 260 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

In cargo bay

Open the right-hand side panel in the cargo
bay.

> BMW Assist is activated.
Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 215.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged in on a
wireless communications network.
> The emergency request system is operable.
When the contract of participation with BMW
Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be
deactivated by a BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center without having to visit a workshop. Once
the BMW Assist system has been deactivated,
emergency requests are not possible. The
BMW Assist system be reactivated by a BMW
Sports Activity Vehicle Center after signing a
new contract.

Initiating an emergency request
1. Briefly press protective cover to open.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
arrangement of the switches and indicator
lamps may differ somewhat.

When the emergency request is received at the
BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist
Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to
answer, the BMW Assist Response Center can
take further steps to help you under certain
conditions.
If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until
the connection has been established. You will
then be able to provide a detailed description of
the situation.
Information for determining the required rescue
measures is transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. the current position of
your vehicle, if this can be determined.
If the LED flashes, but you are unable to hear
the BMW Assist Response Center through the
hands-free system, this could indicate, for
instance, that the hands-free system is no
longer operational. The BMW Assist Response
Center may still be able to hear you, however.
Under certain conditions, an emergency
request is automatically initiated immediately
after a severe accident. An automatic collision
notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the emergency
request cannot be guaranteed under
unfavorable conditions.<

Controls

> Full preparation package mobile phone.
With this equipment, an emergency request
is still possible when no mobile phone is
paired in the vehicle.

Driving tips

Conditions for an emergency request:

As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.

Navigation

Emergency request

Communications Entertainment

Giving and receiving assistance

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 261 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.

Reference

The warning triangle is located in the cargo bay.

Mobility

Warning triangle*

Giving and receiving assistance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 262 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

First-aid kit*
Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit
have a limited service life. Therefore, check the
expiration dates of the contents regularly and
replace the contents concerned in good time if
necessary.
The first-aid kit is stored in the cargo bay,
depending on the vehicle's equipment,
> on the right in a storage tray or
> behind the left side panel

Roadside Assistance*
The BMW Roadside Assistance offers you
assistance in the event of a breakdown around
the clock, including on weekends and public
holidays.
The phone numbers of the Roadside Assistance in your home country can be found in the
Contact brochure.
With BMW Assist or BMW TeleServices, you
can contact BMW Roadside Assistance directly
via iDrive to request assistance in the event of a
breakdown, refer to page 216.

Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle.
3. Switch off any electrical systems and components in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles, otherwise
there is a danger of shorting.<

Connecting jumper cables
To avoid personal injury from sparks, follow this sequence when connecting
jumper cables.<
On your BMW the so-called starting-aid terminal in the engine compartment acts as the battery positive terminal, also refer to the engine
compartment overview on page 240. The cover
cap is marked with +.
1. Fold open the cover of the BMW startingaid terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

Jump starting
When your battery is discharged, you can use
two jumper cables to start your BMW with
power from the battery in a second vehicle. You
can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury,
always avoid all contact with electrical
components while the engine is running. Carefully adhere to the following sequence, both to
prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to
guard against possible personal injuries.<

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+
to the positive terminal of the battery or a
starting-aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second end of the cable to the
positive terminal of the battery or to a starting-aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/–
to the negative terminal of the battery or to
an engine or body ground of the assisting
vehicle.

Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral
loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise damage to the
tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.<

Access to screw thread

Driving tips

Front

Starting engine

Rear

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the connection sequence.
Check the battery and recharge if necessary.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<

Tow-starting and towing
Observe applicable laws and regulations
for tow-starting and towing.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<

Using a tow fitting
The screw-on tow-fitting must always be carried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.

Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 59, otherwise the low
beams, tail lamps, turn signals and windshield
wipers would not be available. When the engine
is stopped, there is no power assist. This then
requires increased effort for braking and steering. Active steering is deactivated and larger
steering wheel movements are required.<
Switch on the hazard warning flashers depending on the local regulations. If the electrical sys-

Communications Entertainment

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.

Navigation

1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle
and allow it to run at idle for several minutes
at slightly increased speed.

Mobility

5. Attach the second end of the cable to the
negative terminal of the battery or to the
engine or body ground of the vehicle to be
started.

Cover panel on left and right side of bumper:
press on the arrow symbol on the cover panel.

Controls

It is located in the toolkit under the floor panel
flap in the cargo bay, refer to page 250.

Reference

Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 263 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Giving and receiving assistance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 264 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with
a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.
Before towing, manually unlock the transmission lock, refer to page 66; failure to
do so can result in damage to the transmission.<
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/
70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km, otherwise the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<

attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to
damage.<

With tow truck
Do not tow your BMW with the front or
rear axle raised individually; otherwise,
the wheels may lock and the transfer case may
be damaged.<

Towing methods
Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body
and chassis parts, otherwise damage may
result.<
In some countries, towing with tow bars or
ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiarize yourself with the regulations on towing in the
respective country.

Have the BMW transported only on a flatbed
surface.

With tow bar

Tow-starting

The towing vehicle may not be lighter
than the vehicle to be towed, otherwise it
will not be possible to reliably control vehicle
response.<

The engine cannot be started by tow-starting.
Start the engine by jump starting it, refer to
page 262.
Have the cause of the starting difficulties eliminated.

The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset
angle, observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will
exert lateral forces, tending to push the
vehicle sideways.
Only attach the tow bar to the tow fittings,
as attachment to other vehicle parts can
lead to damage.<

With tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Only attach tow ropes to the tow fittings, as

Reference

Mobility

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 265 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 266 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 267 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Reference
This chapter contains the technical data,
the short commands of the voice activation
system, and the index that will direct you
as quickly as possible to the information
you are looking for.

Technical data

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 268 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technical data
Engine data
BMW X5
Displacement

cu in/cmμ

No. of cylinders
Maximum output

at engine speed

rpm

Maximum torque

lb ft/Nm

at engine speed

rpm

BMW X6
Displacement

cu in/cmμ

No. of cylinders
Maximum output

at engine speed

rpm

Maximum torque

lb ft/Nm

at engine speed

rpm

X5 xDrive30i

X5 xDrive48i

X5 xDrive35d

182.8/2,996

292.9/4,799

182.6/2,993

260

350

265

6,600

6,300

4,200

225/305

350/475

425/580

2,750

3,400-3,800

1,750-2,250

X6 xDrive35i

X6 xDrive50i

181.8/2,979

268.2/4,395

300

400

5,800-6,250

5,500-6,400

300/407

450/610

1,400-5,000

1,750-4,500

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 269 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Dimensions

Communications Entertainment

Navigation

Driving tips

Controls

BMW X5

All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle diam.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m

Reference

Mobility

With mixed tires* the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.

Technical data

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 270 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

BMW X6

All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle diam.: 42.0 ft/12.8 m
Height with roof rack*: 66.9 in/1,699 mm
With mixed tires* the vehicle width may exceed the specified dimension.

Approved gross vehicle weight

lbs./kg

6,327/2,870

6,537/2,965

6,614/3,000

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

6,008/2,725

6,173/2,800

6,294/2,855

Load

lbs./kg

1,290/585

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

1,102/500

Approved front axle weight

lbs./kg

2,767/1,255

3,020/1,370

3,064/1,390

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

2,778/1,260

3,020/1,370

3,064/1,390

Approved rear axle weight

lbs./kg

3,803/1,725

3,869/1,755

3,858/1,750

without 3rd row seats

lbs./kg

3,395/1,540

Approved roof load capacity

lbs./kg

220/100

Cargo bay capacity

cu ft/l

21.9-61.8/
620-1,750

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.
BMW X6
Approved gross vehicle weight

lbs./kg

X6 xDrive35i

X6 xDrive50i

6,085/2,760

6,294/2,855

Load

lbs./kg

937/425

Approved front axle weight

lbs./kg

2,910/1,320

3,175/1,440

Approved rear axle weight

lbs./kg

3,241/1,470

3,219/1,460

Approved roof load capacity

lbs./kg

Cargo bay capacity

cu ft/l

220/100

25.6-59.7/
570-1,450

Reference

Mobility

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or
the gross vehicle weight.

Controls

X5 xDrive48i X5 xDrive35d

Driving tips

X5 xDrive30i

Navigation

BMW X5

Communications Entertainment

Weights

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 271 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Technical data

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 272 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Capacities
BMW X5

Notes

Fuel tank

US gal/liters

approx. 22.5/85

X5 xDrive30i, X5 xDrive35d

US gal/liters

approx. 2.1/8

X5 xDrive48i

US gal/liters

approx. 2.6/10

Windshield washer
with headlamp washer system

US quarts/liters

approx. 6.9/6.5

Fuel grade: page 225

of that reserve

For more details: page 69

BMW X6

Notes

Fuel tank

US gal/liters

approx. 22.5/85

X6 xDrive35i

US gal/liters

approx. 2.1/8

X6 xDrive50i

US gal/liters

approx. 3.2/12

Windshield washer
with headlamp washer system

US quarts/liters

approx. 6.9/6.5

Fuel grade: page 225

of that reserve

For more details: page 69

Short commands of voice activation
system*

Controls

item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice activation system.

Accessing a music collection

{Music collection}

Accessing tone control

{Tone}

Accessing settings

{Settings}

Accessing the computer

{Onboard info}

Accessing contacts*

{Contacts}

Displaying the phone book*

{Phonebook}

Accessing BMW Assist*

{B M W Assist}

Retrieving home address*

{Home address}

Selecting destination entry*

{Enter address}

Navigation

Command

CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
Function

Command

Playing a CD

{C D on}

Selecting a CD

{Select C D}

Selecting a CD and track

{C D ... track ...} e.g. CD 3 track 5

Selecting a track

{C D track ...} e.g. track 5

Opening the CD and Multimedia menu

{C D and multimedia}

CD and DVD*

{C D and D V D}

Displaying entertainment details in split screen*

{Entertainment details}

Function

Command

Displaying current playback

{Current playback}

Accessing a music collection

{Music collection}

Playing a music collection

{Music collection on}

Mobility

Music collection

Communications Entertainment

Function

Driving tips

Useful short commands

Reference

With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 273 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Short commands of voice activation system

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 274 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Function

Command

Searching for music; opening the menu

{Music search}

Selecting a genre

{Select genre}

Selecting an artist

{Select artist}

Selecting an album

{Select album}

Selecting a track

{Select track}

Selecting track directly*

{Track ...}

Starting playback

{Start play}

Playing back the most frequently played tracks

{Top fifty}

External devices
Function

Command

Selecting external devices

{External devices}

AUX front

{AUX front}

Tone control
Function

Command

Accessing tone control

{Tone}

Radio
FM
Function

Command

Selecting the radio

{Radio}

Selecting FM stations

{F M}

Selecting manual search

{Manual search}

Selecting the frequency range

{Select frequency}

Selecting a station

{Select station} e.g. W-PLJ

AM
Function

Command

Selecting AM stations

{A M}

Selecting manual search

{Manual search}

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 275 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Satellite radio
Command

{Satellite radio}

Switching on the satellite radio

{Satellite radio on}

Selecting a satellite radio channel

{Satellite radio channel ...} e.g. channel 2

Stored stations
Function

Command

Selecting stored stations

{Presets}

Choosing a stored station

{Select preset}

Selecting a stored station

{Preset ...} e.g. stored station 2

Opening the Telephone menu

{Telephone}

Displaying the phone book

{Phonebook}

Redialing

{Redial}

Displaying accepted calls

{Received calls}

Dialing a phone number

{Dial number}

Displaying the list of messages

{Messages}

Displaying Bluetooth devices

{Bluetooth}

Communications Entertainment

Command

Navigation
Function

Command

Navigation menu

{Navigation}

Selecting destination entry

{Enter address}

Entering an address

{Enter address}

Selecting destination guidance

{Guidance}

Starting destination guidance

{Start guidance}

Ending destination guidance

{Stop guidance}

Mobility

General information

Retrieving home address

{Home address}

Selecting route criteria

{Route preference}

Selecting route

{Route information}

Switching on the voice instructions

{Switch on voice instructions}
275

Reference

Function

Navigation

Telephone

Driving tips

Controls

Function

Selecting the satellite radio

Short commands of voice activation system

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 276 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Function

Command

Repeating a voice instruction

{Repeat voice instructions}

Switching off the voice instructions

{Switch off voice instructions}

Displaying the address book

{Address book}

Displaying the last destinations

{Last destinations}

Accessing traffic bulletins

{Traffic Info}

Special destinations

{Points of interest}

Map
Function

Command

Displaying the map

{Map}

Map facing north

{Map facing north}

Map in the direction of travel

{Map in direction of travel}

Perspective map

{Map perspective view}

Automatic scaling of the map*

{Map with automatic scaling}

Changing the scale

{Map scale}

Split screen settings*
Function

Command

Split screen

{Switch on splitscreen}

Switching off the split screen

{Turn off split screen}

Adapting the split screen

{Split screen content}

Split screen current position

{Split screen current position}

Split screen map facing north

{Split screen map facing north}

Split screen direction of travel

{Split screen map in direction of travel}

Split screen perspective

{Split screen perspective}

Automatically scaling the split screen

{Split screen automatic scaling}

Split screen enlarged intersection zoom

{Splitscreen Exit ramp view}

Highlighting split screen traffic info

{Split screen, Traffic Info map}

Split screen, computer

{Split screen on board info}

Split screen, trip computer

{Splitscreen trip computer}

Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Function

Command

Entering a new destination

{Enter address}

Trip list

{Stored trips}

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 277 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Command

{Contacts}

My contacts

{My contacts}

New contact

{New contact}

Function

Command

Accessing BMW Assist*

{B M W Assist}

Accessing the Internet*

{Internet}

Driving tips

BMW Assist

Command

Accessing the computer

{Onboard info}

Accessing the trip computer

{Trip computer}

Accessing vehicle information

{Vehicle info}

Accessing vehicle status

{Vehicle status}

Communications Entertainment

Function

Navigation

Vehicle information

Settings
Function

Command

Opening the main menu

{Main menu}

Selecting the settings

{Settings}

Accessing options

{Options}

Settings on the Control Display

{Control display}

Accessing time and date settings

{Time and date}

Accessing language and unit settings

{Language and units}

Accessing speed limit settings

{Speed}

Activating lighting

{Lighting}

Selecting the door lock

{Door locks}

Mobility

Vehicle

Reference

Function

Accessing contacts

Controls

Contacts

Short commands of voice activation system

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 278 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Equipment
Function

Command

Selecting the air conditioning

{Climate}

Activating Head-Up Display*:

{head up display}

Enabling rear control*

{Allow rear control}

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 279 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 88
Accessories 5
Access to 3rd row seats 48
Acoustic signal, refer to Check
Control 77
Activated-charcoal filter 112
Active seat 52
Active seat ventilation 51
Active steering 96
– malfunction 97
– warning lamp 97
Adaptive brake lamp, brake
force display 97
Adaptive Drive 91
Adaptive fixing system 124
Adaptive Head Light 103
Address for navigation,
entering 141, 147
Adjusting confirmation signals
for locking and unlocking 28
Adjusting opening
height 31, 33
Adjusting temperature with
expanded-scope automatic
climate control 109
Adjusting the tone during
audio operation, refer to
Tone control 160
Adjusting thigh
support 44, 45
Airbags 98
– sitting safely 43
– warning lamp 99
Air distribution
– automatic 108, 113
– manual 110
Air recirculation 110
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 110
– recirculated-air mode 110

Air vents 107
– refer to Ventilation 111
Air vents of automatic climate
control 107
Air volume 109, 113
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 225
Alarm system 34
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
– interior motion sensor 35
– switching off alarm 34
– switching off tilt alarm
sensor and interior motion
sensor 35
– tilt alarm sensor 35
Albums of music
collection 180
Alloy wheels 247
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 238
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 90
Alterations, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
AM, waveband 163
Antenna for mobile phone 202
Antifreeze
– coolant 243
– washer fluid 69
Antilock Brake System
ABS 88
Anti-theft system
– refer to Alarm system 34
– refer to Central locking
system 27
Approved axle weights, refer
to Weights 271
Approved engine oils 243
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 271
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest, front 119

Around the center console 14
Around the steering wheel 10
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 74
Ashtray
– front 120
– rear 120
Assist, refer to separate
operating instructions
Assistance systems, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 88
AUC Automatic recirculatedair control 110
Audio 160
– controls 160
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
Audio CDs, DVD system in
rear 193
Audio device, external 119
Automatic
– air distribution 108, 113
– air volume 108, 113
– headlamp control 102
– liftgate operation 31
– steering wheel adjustment,
refer to Easy entry/exit 54
Automatically switching highbeams on and off, refer to
High-beam assistant 104
Automatic car washes 246
Automatic climate control
– automatic air
distribution 108, 113
– in rear 112
– switching off 111, 113
– ventilation in rear 111
– with 2-zone control 108
– with 4-zone control 112

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 280 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Automatic climate control in
rear
– activating on Control
Display 112
– deactivating on Control
Display 112
Automatic closing of doors,
refer to Automatic soft
closing 30
Automatic curb monitor 53
Automatic garage door
opener 115
Automatic headlamps, refer to
High-beam assistant 104
Automatic Hold 61
– activating 62
– deactivating 62
– parking 62
Automatic lighting
– refer to Automatic headlamp
control 102
– refer to Daytime driving
lamps 103
– refer to Interior lamps 106
– refer to Pathway lighting 103
Automatic low-beams, refer to
High-beam assistant 104
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 110
Automatic Service
Request 219
Automatic soft closing 30
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– deactivating selector lever
interlock 65
– kick-down 65
– manually releasing
transmission lock 66
– tow-starting 264
– with comfort access 36
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 108, 113
AUX-IN connection 119, 183
Average fuel consumption 73
– setting units 80
Average speed, refer to
Computer 73

Avoiding highways for
navigation 150
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 35
Axle weights, refer to
Weights 271

B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Backrests, refer to Seats 44
Backrest width adjustment 45
Backup lamps, replacing
bulbs 251, 254
Band-aids, refer to First-aid
kit 262
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone, refer to Snapin adapter 212
Bass, tone setting 160
Battery
– charging 258
– jump starting 262
– power failure 259
– refer to Vehicle battery 258
Battery disposal
– remote control with comfort
access 37
– vehicle battery 258
Battery for mobile phone 212
Battery replacement
– remote control for DVD
system in rear 189
– remote control with comfort
access 37
Being towed 263
Belts, refer to Safety belts 49
Beverage holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Blower, refer to Air
volume 109, 113
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 204
BMW Advanced Diesel 226
BMW Assist 215
– activating 217
BMW homepage 4

BMW maintenance
system 244
BMW Search 217
BMW Sports Activity Vehicle
Center 219
BMW TeleServices 216
BMW website 4
Bottle holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Brake assistant 88
Brake force display 97
Brake lamps
– brake force display 97
– replacing bulbs 251, 254
Brake rotors 132
Brakes
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 88
– brake assistant 88
– brake force display 97
– breaking-in 130
– CBC Cornering Brake
Control 88
– electronic brake-force
distribution 88
– parking brake 61
– refer to Braking safely 132
– warning lamp 13
Brake system 130
– brake pads 130
– breaking-in 130
– disk brakes 132
Braking safely 132
Breakdown, Flat Tire
Monitor 92
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 262
Breaking-in brake pads 130
Breaking-in rear axle
differential 130
Break-in period 130
Brightness
– of Control Display 80
– on Head-Up Display 100
Button for starting engine 59
Buttons on steering wheel 11

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

CD
– audio playback 172
– refer to Playing audio tracks,
DVD system in rear 193
CD-/DVD player in rear 188
CD changer 171
– controls 160
– fast forward/reverse 173
– random play sequence 172
– selecting a track 172
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
CD player 171
– controls 160
– fast forward/reverse 173
– random play sequence 172
– selecting a track 172
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
Cell phone, refer to Mobile
phone
Center armrest
– front 119
– rear 122
Center brake lamp 253, 256
Center console 14
Central locking system 27
– comfort access 35
– from inside vehicle 30
Changes, technical
– refer to For your own
safety 5
– refer to Parts and
accessories 5
Changing gears using shift
paddles 65
Changing language on
Control Display 81
Changing tires 237
Changing trips 149
Changing units of measure on
Control Display 80
Changing wheels 256
Check Control 77
Checking the air pressure,
refer to Tire inflation
pressure 229

Mobility

Calibrating driver's seat 50
California Proposition 65
Warning 6
Call
– accepting 205
– ending 205
– rejecting 205
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 206
Calling, refer to telephone
operating instructions
Camera
– refer to Rear view camera 86
– refer to Top View 84
Can holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Capacities 272
Capacity of cargo bay 271
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 258
Care 246
– car-care products 246
– carpets 248
– car washes 246
– CD/DVD-player 249
– chrome components 247
– displays 249
– exterior 246
– fine wooden
components 248
– hand washing 247
– headlamps 247
– high-pressure cleaning
jets 247
– interior 248
– leather 248
– light-alloy wheels 247
– paint 247
– plastic components 248
– rubber gaskets 247
– running boards 248
– safety belts 248
– sensors and cameras 248
– upholstery materials and
cloth-covered paneling 248
– windows 247

Cargo
– refer to Loading 133
– securing 134
– securing with ski bag 126
Cargo area, refer to Cargo
bay 122
Cargo area cover, refer to Rollup cover 122
Cargo bay
– capacity 271
– emergency actuation, refer
to Manually opening or
closing 34
– emergency operation, refer
to Opening manually 31
– expanding 124
– opening 33
– opening/closing, refer to
Liftgate 30, 33
– opening/closing, refer to
Tailgate 33
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– opening with remote
control 28
Cargo bay cover, refer to Rollup cover 122
Caring for the vehicle
finish 247
Car key, refer to Keys/remote
control 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 119
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– refer to Telephone 202
Car radio, refer to Radio 163
Car wash 246
– before driving in 60
– with comfort access 37
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 131
CBC Cornering Brake
Control 88
CBS Condition Based
Service 244

Reference

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 281 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 282 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Children, transporting 55
Child restraint devices 55
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 56
Child-safety locks 58
Child seats 55
Chime, refer to Check
Control 77
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 121
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 246
Clock 71
– 12h/24h mode 80
– setting time 79
Closing
– from inside 30
– using remote control 27
Closing fuel filler cap 224
Clothes hooks 119
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting
engine 60
Comfort access 35
– observe in car wash 37
– replacing battery 37
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Comfort start, refer to Starting
engine 60
Compact wheel
– inflation pressure 231
– wheel change 256
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Compartments, refer to
Storage compartments 119
Compass, digital 116
Computer 73
– displays in instrument
panel 73
– displays on Control
Display 74
Concierge service 216
Condition Based Service
CBS 244

Connecting car vacuum
cleaner, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 121
Connecting headphones 188
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 73
Consumption indicator,
energy control 72
Consumption statistics, refer
to Average fuel
consumption 73
Contacts, creating 213
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– setting brightness 80
– switching on/off 19
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls, refer to Cockpit 10
Controls DVD system in
rear 187
Convenience operation
– glass sunroof 28, 29
– glass sunroof with comfort
access 36
– windows 28, 29
– windows with comfort
access 36
– with comfort access 36
Coolant 243
– checking level 243
– temperature 72
Cooling, maximum 110
Cornering Brake Control
CBC 88
Country codes DVD 173
Country information from
BMW Online 157
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 106
Cradle for telephone or mobile
phone 119
Criteria for route 150
Cruise control 69
Cruising range 73
Cup holders 119

Current playback
– external devices 185
– of music collection 180
Customer Relations 218
Cylinders, refer to Engine
data 268

D
Data 268
– capacities 272
– dimensions 269
– engine 268
– technical data 268
– weights 271
Data transfer 220
Date 71
– display format 80
– retrieving 71
– setting 80
Daytime driving lamps 103
Defrosting windows 109
Defrosting windows and
removing condensation 109
Defrost position, refer to
Defrosting windows 109
Deleting a trip 149
Deleting special
destinations 146
Destination, entering by town/
city name 141
Destination address,
entering 141, 147
Destination entry using BMW
Assist 145
Destination for navigation
– entering 141
– entering by voice 147
– entering via map 146
Destination guidance 150
– bypassing a route
section 151
– changing specified
route 150
– continuing 150
– starting 150
– voice instructions 152
– volume of voice
instructions 152

E
Easy entry/exit 54
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD/DVD player 160
Electrical malfunction
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 66
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– glass sunroof, electric 42
– liftgate 31
– panorama glass sunroof 40
– parking brake 63
Electric seat 44
Electronic brake-force
distribution 88
Electronic oil level check 241

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

DVD system in rear 187
– CD/DVD player 188
– connecting headphones 188
– controls 187
– displaying images from CD/
DVD 195
– DVD country codes 190
– external device 198
– information on CD/DVD
player 196
– playing audio tracks from
CD/DVD 193
– playing video from CD/
DVD 190
– remote control 188
– switching on/off 189
DVD video 173
Dynamic Performance
Control 90
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 88
Dynamic Traction, refer to
Dynamic Traction
Control 89
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC 89

Mobility

Door key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Door lock 29
Door locking, confirmation
signals 28
Doors
– manual operation 29
– remote control 27
DOT Quality Grades 235
Downhill driving assistance,
refer to HDC 90
Draft-free ventilation 111
Drinks holder, refer to Cup
holders 119
Driver's seat, calibrating 50
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 102
Driving on poor roads 135
Driving stability control
systems 88
Driving through water 132
Driving tips, refer to General
driving notes 130
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 110
Drying the air, refer to Cooling
function 110
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
– indicator lamp 13, 89
DSC OFF, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control 88
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 89
– activating 89
– indicator lamp 89
DVD
– country codes 173
– settings 174
– video playback 173
DVD changer, refer to CD
changer 171
DVD menu 174
DVD player, refer to CD
player 171

Reference

Diesel exhaust fluid
– at low temperatures 226
– at minimum 226
– refilling yourself 227
Diesel particulate filter 131
Digital clock 71
Digital compass 116
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 164
Dimensions 269
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 67
Direction announcements,
refer to Voice
instructions 152
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 152
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 143
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 268
Display, refer to iDrive 16
Displaying images 195
Displaying special
destinations 146
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 105
Displays, refer to Instrument
panel 12
Displays on the windshield,
refer to Head-Up
Display 100
Disposal
– battery of remote control
with comfort access 37
– battery of the remote
control, DVD system in
rear 189
– vehicle battery 258
Distance, refer to
Computer 74
Distance to destination, refer
to Computer 74
Distance warning, refer to
PDC Park Distance
Control 82
Door entry lighting 106

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 283 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 284 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– liftgate 31
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 66
Emergency request 261
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 262
Engine
– breaking-in 130
– data 268
– oil temperature 72
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 72
– speed 268
– starting 60
– starting, with comfort
access 36
– switching off 60
Engine compartment 240
Engine coolant 243
Engine oil
– adding 242
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 243
– approved engine oil 243
– checking oil level 241
– electronic oil level check 241
– temperature 72
Engine oil temperature 72
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 268
Engine overheating, refer to
Coolant temperature 72
Engine speed 268
Engine starting, refer to
Starting engine 60
Entering special destinations
by name 145
Entertainment sound output
on/off 160
Entry map for destination 146
Equalizer, tone setting 161

ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to DSC
Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Event Data Recorders 245
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 131
Extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile
phone 183
Exterior mirrors 52
– adjusting 52
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– automatic heating 52
– folding in and out 52
– tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 53
External audio device 119
Eye for tow-starting and
towing, refer to Tow
fitting 263

F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 77
False alarm, refer to Avoiding
unintentional alarms 35
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 49
– warning lamp 50
Fastest route for
navigation 150
Fast forward
– CD changer 173
– CD player 173
Fault displays, refer to Check
Control 77
Filler neck for washer fluid 69
First aid, refer to First-aid
kit 262
First-aid kit 262
Fixing system, adaptive 124
Flashing during locking/
unlocking, refer to Setting
confirmation signals 28

Flat tire
– changing wheels 256
– compact wheel 256
– Flat Tire Monitor 92
– run-flat tires 93, 95, 237
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92
Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler
neck for washer fluid 69
FM, waveband 163
Fog lamps 105
– indicator lamp 13, 105
Folding display screen open/
closed, DVD system in
rear 187
Folding rear seat backrest 124
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 132
Footwell lamps 106
For your own safety 5
4-wheel drive system, refer to
xDrive 90
Free memory capacity, music
collection 181
Front airbags 98
Front passenger airbags 98
– deactivating 98
– refer to Exception of front
passenger seat 55
Front seat adjustment 44
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 92
– false alarms 92
– indicating a flat tire 93
– initializing the system 93
– snow chains 238
– system limits 92
– warning lamp 93
Fuel 225
– capacity 272
– display 73
– high-quality brands 225
– quality 225
– saving 130
– specifications 225
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 73

IBOC, refer to HD Radio 164
Ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 71
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 71
Identification, tire 238
Identification mark, run-flat
tires 237
iDrive 16
– changing language 81
– changing settings 79
– changing units of measure
and display type 80
– controller 16
– controls 16
– main menu 17
– setting brightness 80
– setting date 80
– setting time 79
– status information 19
Ignition 59
– switched off 59
– switched on 59
285

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation

Communications Entertainment

Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 115
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 225
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 73
Gearshifts, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
General driving
notes 130, 131
Glass sunroof
– convenience operation from
outside 29
– convenience operation with
comfort access 36
– remote control 28
Glass sunroof, electric 40
– moving manually 42
– opening, closing 41
– power interruption 42
– raising 41
Glove compartment 118
– lighting 118
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 140
Grills, refer to Ventilation 111
Grills of the automatic climate
control 107
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 271
Guided Tours 149

Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 61
– Automatic Hold 61
Hands-free system, refer to
Microphone 14
Hand washing 247
Having diesel exhaust fluid
refilled 226
Hazard warning flashers 15
HDC Hill Descent Control 90
HD Radio 164
Head airbags 98
Headlamp control,
automatic 102
Headlamp flasher 67
Headlamps 102
– cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 67
– replacing bulbs 250
Head Light, refer to Adaptive
Head Light 103
Head restraints 46
– sitting safely 43
Head-Up Display 100
Heated
– mirrors 52
– rear window 109
– seats 50, 51
– steering wheel 54
Heating 107
– exterior mirrors 52
– interior 107
– rear window 109
– residual heat 110
– seats 50, 51
– steering wheel 54
Heating with engine switched
off, refer to Residual
heat 110
Heavy cargo, refer to Securing
cargo 134
Height
– on Head-Up Display 100
– refer to Dimensions 269
Height adjustment
– seats 44
– steering wheel 53

High-beam assistant 104
High beams 67, 104
– automatically switching on
and off, refer to High-beam
assistant 104
– headlamp flasher 67
– indicator lamp 13
High-pressure cleaning
jets 247
High water, refer to Driving
through water 132
Highway, refer to Route
criteria 150
Hill Descent Control HDC 90
Hills 132
Holder for cups 119
Homepage 4
Hood 239
Horn 10
Hot exhaust system 131
Hydraulic brake assistant,
refer to Brake assistant 88
Hydroplaning 132

Mobility

Reference

Fuel consumption display,
computer, average fuel
consumption 73
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 73
Fuel filler door 224
– closing 224
– opening 224
– releasing manually 224
Fuses 259

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 285 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 286 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Ignition key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 59
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 59
Ignition lock 59
– starting engine with comfort
access 36
Importing special
destinations 146
Importing trips 149
Indicator/warning lamps 13
– active steering 97
– airbags 99
– DSC 13, 89
– DTC 89
– fasten safety belt 50
– Flat Tire Monitor 93
– fog lamps 13
– TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 95
Individual settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 229
Inflation pressure monitoring
– refer to FTM Flat Tire
Monitor 92
– refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Initializing
– Flat Tire Monitor 93
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 164
– refer to Power failure 259
– refer to Setting date 80
– refer to Setting time 79
– seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Installation location, mobile
phone 119
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 152
Instrument cluster
– refer to Cockpit 10
– refer to Instrument panel 12

Instrument illumination, refer
to Instrument lighting 105
Instrument lighting 105
Instrument panel 12
– refer to Cockpit 10
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 115
Interactive map 147
Interior lamps 106
– switching on with remote
control 28
Interior motion sensor 35
– switching off 35
Interior rearview mirror 53
– automatic dimming
feature 53
– compass 116
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 68
Intersection, entering,
navigation 142
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN connection 183
iPod, connecting, refer to
USB-audio interface 183

J
Jacking points 257
Joystick
– refer to iDrive 16
– refer to Selector lever,
selecting transmission
positions 64
Jump starting 262

K
Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort
access 35
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort access 35
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Keys 26
– key-related settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26

Kick-down, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Knock control 225

L
Lamps
– refer to High-beam
assistant 104
– refer to Parking lamps/low
beams 102
Lamps and bulbs 250
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 134
Last destinations 144
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 56
Leather care 248
LEDs light-emitting
diodes 251
Length, refer to
Dimensions 269
License plate lamp, replacing
bulbs 253, 256
Liftgate 30, 33
– adjusting opening
height 31, 33
– automatic operation 31
– closing 31, 34
– locking and unlocking from
inside 30
– manually opening or
closing 34
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– opening manually 31
Light-emitting diodes
LEDs 251
Lighter 121
Lighter socket 121
Lighting
– instruments 105
– lamps and bulbs 250
– of the vehicle, refer to
Lamps 102
Light switch 102
Load 133

M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 238
Main menu, iDrive 17

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Microphone
– for mobile phone 14
– for telephone 14
– for voice activation
system 14
Mirror dimming feature 53
Mirrors 52
– automatic curb monitor 53
– exterior mirrors 52
– folding in and out 52
– heating 52
– interior rearview mirror 53
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 205
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 202
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest, front 119
– operation via iDrive 205
– pairing 202
– refer to separate operating
instructions
– refer to Telephone 202
Monitor, refer to iDrive 16
Monitoring tire pressure, refer
to FTM Flat Tire Monitor 92
MP3 player, connecting
– refer to AUX-IN
connection 183
– refer to USB-audio
interface 183
Multifunction steering wheel,
refer to Buttons on steering
wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher/high
beams 67
– refer to Washer/wiper
system 67
Music
– managing 181
– playing 179
– storing 178
Music collection 178
– backup 181

Mobility

Maintenance
– refer to Service and
Warranty Information
Booklet for US models 244
– refer to Service
requirements 74
– refer to Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models 244
Maintenance system 244
Malfunction
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– glass sunroof, electric 42
– liftgate 31
– panorama glass sunroof 40
– parking brake 63
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 77
Manual air distribution 110
Manually releasing
transmission lock 66
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Manual operation
– door lock 29
– driver's door 29
– fuel filler door 224
– transmission lock, automatic
transmission 66
Map display 152
Map for navigation
– changing scale 153
– entering destination 146
Master key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Maximum cooling 110
Maximum speed
– for winter tires 238
– with compact wheel 258
Memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Messages 208
Microfilter 112

Reference

Loading 133
– securing cargo 134
– stowing cargo 134
– vehicle 133
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 134
Lock buttons in the doors,
refer to Locking 30
Locking
– from inside 30
– setting confirmation
signals 28
– using remote control 27
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 35
Locking and unlocking doors
– from inside 30
– setting confirmation
signals 28
Locking without key, refer to
Comfort access 35
Low beams 102
– automatic 102
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 45
Low-sulfur diesel 225
Lug bolts 257
– tightening torque, refer to
After mounting 258
– wrench 257
Luggage compartment
capacity, refer to Cargo bay
capacity 271
Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 135
Lumbar support 45
LW, waveband 163

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 287 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 288 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Music player
– connecting, refer to USBaudio interface 183
Music player, connecting
– refer to AUX-IN
connection 183
Music search 179
My Info 208

N
Navigation data 140
Navigation destination
– entering manually 141
– home address 144
Navigation instructions, refer
to Switching voice
instructions on/off 152
Navigation system 140
– address book 143
– bypassing a route
section 151
– continuing destination
guidance 150
– destination entry 141
– entering a destination by
voice 147
– entering a destination
manually 141
– questions about system 157
– route list 151
– selecting destination via
map 146
– selecting route criteria 150
– special destinations 144
– starting destination
guidance 150
– terminating destination
guidance 150
– trip planner 148
– voice instructions 152
– volume adjustment 152
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 46
New remote control 26
New wheels and tires 237
North-facing map 152

Nozzles, refer to Windshield
washer nozzles 68
Nylon rope, refer to Towstarting and towing 263

O
OBD socket 245
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 225
Odometer 71
Oil
– additives, refer to Approved
engine oils 243
– approved engine oils 243
– consumption, refer to
Checking engine oil
level 241
– level 241
– refilling, refer to Adding
engine oil 242
Oil change interval, refer to
Service requirements 74
Onboard computer, refer to
iDrive 16
Onboard toolkit 250
Opening and closing
– comfort access 35
– from inside 30
– panorama glass sunroof 39
– using remote control 27
– using the door lock 29
Opening liftgate 33
Operation on poor roads 135
Options, selecting for
navigation 150
Orientation menu, refer to
Main menu 17
Output, refer to Engine
data 268
Outside air, refer to AUC
Automatic recirculated-air
control 110
Outside temperature
display 71
– changing unit of measure 80
Outside temperature
warning 71
Overview, radio control 160

P
Panic mode 28
Panorama glass sunroof 38
– moving manually 40
– power failure 40
– raising, opening, closing 39
Park Distance Control PDC 82
Parked-car ventilation 114
– preselecting activation
times 114
– switching on and off
directly 114
Parking, vehicle 60
Parking aid
– refer to PDC Park Distance
Control 82
– refer to Rear view camera 86
Parking assistance
– refer to PDC Park Distance
Control 82
– refer to Top View 84
Parking brake 61
– Automatic Hold 61
– indicator lamp 13
– releasing manually 61
– releasing manually in case of
an electrical malfunction 63
– setting manually 61
Parking lamps 102
Parking with Automatic
Hold 62
Particulate filter, refer to
Diesel particulate filter 131
Parts and accessories 5
Passenger-side exterior
mirror, tilting down 53
Pathway lighting 103
Paying attention to speed 238
PDC Park Distance Control 82
Personal Profile 26
Phone book 205
Phone numbers, dialing 206
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 41
– panorama glass sunroof 39
– power windows 38
Plasters, refer to First-aid
kit 262

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Radio
– controls 160
– HD Radio 164
– satellite radio 166
– selecting waveband 163
– storing stations 164
– switching on/off 160
– tone control 160
– volume 160
– Weather band, refer to
Weather reports 165
Radio key, refer to Keys/
remote control 26
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 59
Radio readiness 59
– switched off 59
– switched on 59
– with comfort access 36

Recirculated-air mode 110
– air recirculation 110
– AUC Automatic
recirculated-air control 110
Reclining seat, refer to
Seats 44
Reflectors, refer to Tail
lamps 251, 254
Refueling 224
Releasing
– hood 239
– refer to Unlocking 36
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 73
Remaining distance to
destination, refer to
Computer 74
Remote control 26
– comfort access 35
– garage door opener 115
– liftgate 28
– malfunction 29, 37
– replacing battery 37
Remote control, DVD system
in rear 188
– battery replacement 189
Removing condensation on
the windows 109
Replacement fuses 259
Replacement of tires 237
– changing wheels 256
– new wheels and tires 237
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 250
Replacing wheels/tires, refer
to New wheels and tires 237
Replacing wiper blades 250
Reporting an accident, refer to
Initiating an emergency
request 261
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 73
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 162
Residual heat 110

Mobility

Rain sensor 68
Reading lamps 106
Rear automatic climate
control
– air flow 113
– switching off 113
Rear entertainment, refer to
DVD system in rear 187
Rear fog lamps, indicator
lamp 13
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 251, 254
– replacing bulbs 251, 254
Rear seat backrest,
folding 124
Rear seats
– adjusting 48
– adjusting head restraints 48
– folding over backrest 124
– head restraint adjustment 48
– heating 51
Rear socket 121
Rear ventilation 111
– automatic climate control in
rear 112
– 3rd row seats 112
Rear view camera 86
– cleaning 88
– displays on Control
Display 87
– driver assistance
functions 86
– switching off 86
– switching on 86
Rearview mirror 52
Rear window
– heating 109
– replacing wiper blade 250
– windshield wiper 68, 246
Rear window safety switch 38
Rear window wiper, replacing
wiper blade 250
Reception
– quality 164
– radio station 164
Reception level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 19

Reference

Playing videos, DVD system in
rear 190
Plug-in unit for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 59
Postal code, entering for
navigation 142
Power failure 259
Power steering-wheel
adjustment 54
Power windows, refer to
Windows 37
Preglowing, refer to Diesel
engine 60
Preselecting activation times
of parked-car
ventilation 114
Pressure, tires 229
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Protective function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass sunroof, electric 41
– panorama glass sunroof 39
– windows 38

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 289 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 290 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Restraint systems
– for children 55
– refer to Safety belts 49
Retreaded tires 237
Reverse
– CD changer 173
– CD player 173
Reverse gear, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Road map 152
Roadside Assistance 262
Roadside assistance 216
Roadside parking lamps 104
Roller blinds, refer to Roller
sun blinds 118
Roller sun blinds 118
Roll-up cover 122
roll-up cover 122
Roof load capacity 271
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 135
Rope, refer to Tow-starting
and towing 263
Rotary pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 150, 151
– bypassing sections 151
– changing 150, 151
– changing criteria 150
– displaying map view 152
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 151
– selecting 150
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 152
Route map, refer to Map
display 152
Route section, changing 151
Route selection 150
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Runflat tires 237

Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-Flat
Tires 237
Run-flat tires 237
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 93, 95
– flat tire 93, 95
– new wheels and tires 237
– tire inflation
pressure 93, 95, 229
– tire replacement 237

S
Safety 5
Safety belts 49
– damage 50
– sitting safely 43
– warning lamp 50
Safety belt tensioners
– refer to Airbags 98
– refer to Safety belts 49
Safety systems
– ABS Antilock Brake
System 88
– airbags 98
– driving stability control
systems 88
– DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
– safety belts 49
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 237
Satellite radio 166
Screen, refer to iDrive 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 263
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 166
Seat heating 50, 51

Seats 44
– adjusting 44
– adjusting electrically 44
– adjusting manually 44
– backrest width 45
– heating 50, 51
– in rear 48
– lumbar support 45
– memory, refer to Seat, mirror
and steering wheel
memory 45
– 2nd row seats 48
– shoulder support 45
– sitting safely 43
– storing the setting 45
– thigh support 44, 45
– 3rd row seats 49
– ventilation, refer to Active
seat ventilation and Seat
heating 51
2nd row seats 48
Securing load
– refer to Securing cargo 134
– with ski bag, refer to
Securing cargo 126
Selecting new scale for
navigation 153
Selector lever, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 64
Selector lever lock, refer to
Reverse gear 65
Self-leveling suspension 92
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 262
Service and Warranty
Information Booklet for
US models 244
Service interval indicator, refer
to Service requirements 74
Service Request 219
Service requirements 74
– also refer to CBS Condition
Based Service 244
Service status 220

Controls
Driving tips
Navigation
Communications Entertainment

Starting assistance, refer to
Jump starting 262
Starting assistant 92
Starting difficulties, jump
starting 262
Starting off on slopes, refer to
Starting assistant 92
State/province, for
navigation 141
Station selection, radio 163
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam cleaners 247
Steering wheel
– adjusting 53
– automatic adjustment, refer
to Steering wheel
memory 45
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– easy entry/exit 54
– heating 54
– memory 45
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering 96
Steptronic, refer to Sport
program and manual mode
M/S 65
Storage compartments 119
Storing a trip 148
Storing sitting position, refer
to Seat, mirror and steering
wheel memory 45
Storing tires 238
Storing vehicle 249
Storing your vehicle 249
Street, entering,
navigation 142
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 229
SVCD 173
SW, waveband 163
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching cooling function on
and off 110
Switching off engine 60

Mobility

Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 212
– use 202
Snow chains 238
Socket for Onboard
Diagnostics interface 245
Socket for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 59
Sockets, refer to Connecting
electrical devices 121
Soft closure aid, refer to
Automatic soft closing 30
Soot particle filter, refer to
Diesel particulate filter 131
SOS, refer to Initiating an
emergency request 261
Spare fuses 259
Spare remote control 26
Spare wheel
– refer to Changing
wheels 256
– refer to Compact wheel 256
Special destinations 144
Special oils, refer to Approved
engine oils 243
Specified oil grades, refer to
Approved engine oils 243
Speed
– with compact wheel 258
– with winter tires 238
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 78
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 161
Split screen, refer to Control
Display, switching on/off 19
Split screen content, refer to
Display for split screen
content, selecting 19
Sport program, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 88
Start/Stop button 59
Starting, refer to Starting
engine 60

Reference

Settings
– changing on Control
Display 79
– clock, 12h/24h mode 80
– configuring, refer to
Personal Profile 26
– DVD 174
– language 81
Settings for the map
display 153
Setting speed limit 78
Setting time, refer to
Preselecting activation
times 114
Shifting, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 65
Shift paddles 65
Short commands of voice
activation system 273
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 150
Shoulder support 45
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 172
– CD player 172
Side airbags 98
Side marker lamps, replacing
bulbs 251
Signal horn, refer to Horn 10
Sitting safely 43
– with airbags 43
– with head restraint 43
– with safety belts 43
Ski bag 125
Slide show, refer to Displaying
images 195
Sliding/tilt sunroof
– refer to Glass sunroof,
electric 40
– refer to Panorama glass
sunroof 38
Slope assistant, refer to
Starting assistant 92
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 120
SMS 208

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 291 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 292 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Switching on
– audio 160
– CD changer 160
– CD player 160
– radio 160
Swiveling headlamps, refer to
Adaptive Head Light 103
Symbols 4
– indicator/warning lamps 13
– status information 19
– traffic information with
navigation system 153

T
Tachometer 72
Tailgate 33
Tail lamps 251, 254
– replacing bulbs 251, 254
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 272
Target cursor for
navigation 146
Technical alterations, refer to
For your own safety 5
Technical data 268
Telephone 202
– refer to separate operating
instructions
Teleservice Diagnosis 217
Teleservice Help 217
TeleServices, activating 218
Temperature
– adjusting with automatic
climate control 109, 113
– changing units of
measure 80
– refer to Coolant
temperature 72
Temperature display
– outside temperature 71
– setting units 80
– temperature warning 71
Temperature warning 71
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 69
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 253, 256

3rd row seats 49
Tightening torque of the lug
bolts, refer to After
mounting 258
Tilt alarm sensor, switching
off 35
Tilting down passenger-side
exterior mirror 53
Timer, refer to Preselecting
activation times 114
Tire inflation pressure
monitoring, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 92
Tire inflation pressures 229
– checking 229
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Tire Quality Grading 235
Tires
– age 235
– air loss 93, 95
– breaking-in 130
– changing 237
– condition 236
– damage 236
– flat tire, refer to Changing
wheels 256
– inflation pressure 229
– inflation pressure
monitoring, refer to FTM
Flat Tire Monitor 92
– new wheels and tires 237
– pressure loss 93, 95
– pressure monitoring, refer to
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
– replacing 256
– retreaded tires 237
– run-flat tires 237
– size 235
– tread 236
– wear indicators 236
– wheel/tire combination 237
– winter tires 238
TMC station, refer to Traffic
information 153
Tone
– control 160
– middle setting 162

Tone on locking/unlocking 28
Tools, refer to Onboard
toolkit 250
Top 50 of music
collection 180
Top View 84
Torque
– engine 268
– lug bolts, refer to After
mounting 258
Tow fitting 263
Towing 263
Town/city, for navigation 141
Tow-starting 263, 264
TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
– resetting system 94
– system limits 94
– warning lamp 95
Track, selecting on CD 172
TRACTION, refer to DTC 89
Traction-assist feature, refer
to DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Traction control, refer to
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 88
Traffic bulletins
– categories 155
– filtering 155
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 153
– in map display 155
Traffic congestion
– displaying traffic
information 153
– refer to Route, bypassing
sections 151
Traffic information for
navigation during
destination guidance 155
Transmission
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 64
– manually releasing
transmission lock on
automatic transmission with
Steptronic 66

Controls
Driving tips

Warning lamps, refer to
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 77
Warning tone, volume 81
Warning triangle 261
Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian
models 244
Washer/wiper system 67
– rain sensor 68
– washer fluid 69
– windshield washer
nozzles 68
Washer fluid 69
– capacity of the reservoir 69
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 132
Water penetration 247
Waveband for radio 163
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 236
Weather reports 165
Website 4
Weights 271
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to New wheels and tires 237
Wheel/tire damage 236
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 269
Wheels and tires 229
Width, refer to
Dimensions 269
Windows 37
– convenience operation 28
– convenience operation from
outside 29
– convenience operation with
comfort access 36
– opening, closing 37
– pinch protection system 38
– safety switch 38

Navigation

Valve screw caps, refer to
After mounting 258
VCD 173
Vehicle
– battery 258
– breaking-in 130
– loading 133
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 269
– parking 60
– storing 249
– weights 271
Vehicle care, refer to Care 246
Vehicle jack 257
– jacking points 257
Ventilation 111
– draft-free 111
– in the rear 111
– rear automatic climate
control 113
– 3rd row seats 112
– while stationary 114
Vent outlets of automatic
climate control 107
Vents, refer to Ventilation 111
Video menu 174
Video playback 173
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 152
Voice activation system 22
– short commands 273
Voice instructions for
navigation system 152
– repeating 152
– switching on/off 152
– volume 152
Volume 160
– audio sources 160
– mobile phone 205
– voice instructions 152
Volume balance, tone
setting 161
Volume of warning tones 81

Communications Entertainment

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 235
Units
– average fuel
consumption 80
– temperature 80
Universal garage-door
opener, refer to Integrated
universal remote
control 115
Universal remote control 115
Unlocking
– from inside 30
– liftgate 28
– setting behavior 28
– using remote control 27
– without key, refer to Comfort
access 35
Unlocking and locking doors
using remote control 27
Unlocking without key, refer to
Comfort access 35
Updating the navigation
data 140
USB audio interface 183
Used batteries
– refer to Disposal 258
– refer to Replacing battery 37

Mobility

Reference

Transmission positions, refer
to Automatic transmission
with Steptronic 64
Transporting children
safely 55
Transport securing device,
refer to Securing cargo 134
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tread depth 236
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 71
Trip odometer 71
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 269
Turn signals 67
– indicator lamp 12
– replacing bulbs 251, 254

At a glance

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 293 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 294 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Windshield
– cleaning, refer to Washer/
wiper system 67
– defrosting, refer to
Defrosting windows 109
– displays, refer to Head-Up
Display 100
Windshield washer system
– refer to Washer/wiper
system 67
– windshield washer
nozzles 68
Windshield wipers, refer to
Washer/wiper system 67
– replacing wiper blades 250
Winter diesel 225
Winter tires 238
– storage 238
Word matching principle for
navigation 149
Working in the engine
compartment 239
Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer
to Onboard toolkit 250

X
xDrive 90
Xenon lamps 251, 253
– bulb changing 251, 253

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 295 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

Everything from A to Z

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 296 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 297 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

ba8_e70ag.book Seite 298 Freitag, 5. Juni 2009 11:42 11

More about BMW

The Ultimate
Driving Machine

01 41 2 602 756 ue

bmwusa.com

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Annotate, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseNone
Signing Date                    : 2009:06:10 07:30:44+02:00
Signing Authority               : ARE Acrobat Product v8.0 P23 0002337
Document Usage Rights           : FullSave
Annotation Usage Rights         : Create, Delete, Modify, Copy, Import, Export
Form Usage Rights               : Add, FillIn, Delete, SubmitStandalone
Signature Usage Rights          : Modify
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : untitled
Create Date                     : 2009:06:05 11:40:48Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 7.0
Modify Date                     : 2009:06:10 07:30:53+02:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:06:10 07:30:53+02:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:4d4e0b72-74bf-49bd-a8b7-c2b41717e993
Instance ID                     : uuid:b23d0f79-ddf8-4534-b7cd-66d7beca6379
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 300
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Creator                         : FrameMaker 7.0

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Bmw 2010 X5 Xdrive30I Owners Manual

Bmw-2010-X5-X5M-X6-And-X6M-Owners-Manual-761992 bmw-2010-x5-x5m-x6-and-x6m-owners-manual-761992

2010-x5mx6mseries 2010-x5mx6mseries

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation